WO2002096713A1 - Information processor for moving body - Google Patents

Information processor for moving body Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2002096713A1
WO2002096713A1 PCT/JP2001/004433 JP0104433W WO02096713A1 WO 2002096713 A1 WO2002096713 A1 WO 2002096713A1 JP 0104433 W JP0104433 W JP 0104433W WO 02096713 A1 WO02096713 A1 WO 02096713A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
display
unit
information
seat
analysis
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2001/004433
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Toyoaki Kitano
Masahiro Ieda
Osamu Kono
Yasuhisa Nakamura
Shimon Okada
Kei Kasuga
Shinichi Kato
Original Assignee
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha filed Critical Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha
Priority to JP2002520794A priority Critical patent/JPWO2002096713A1/en
Priority to PCT/JP2001/004433 priority patent/WO2002096713A1/en
Publication of WO2002096713A1 publication Critical patent/WO2002096713A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C21/00Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
    • G01C21/26Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network
    • G01C21/34Route searching; Route guidance
    • G01C21/36Input/output arrangements for on-board computers
    • G01C21/3664Details of the user input interface, e.g. buttons, knobs or sliders, including those provided on a touch screen; remote controllers; input using gestures
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R11/02Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R11/02Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof
    • B60R11/0211Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof for record carriers apparatus, e.g. video recorders, tape players or CD players
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R11/02Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof
    • B60R11/0229Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof for displays, e.g. cathodic tubes
    • B60R11/0235Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof for displays, e.g. cathodic tubes of flat type, e.g. LCD
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R11/04Mounting of cameras operative during drive; Arrangement of controls thereof relative to the vehicle
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C21/00Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
    • G01C21/26Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network
    • G01C21/265Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network constructional aspects of navigation devices, e.g. housings, mountings, displays
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C21/00Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
    • G01C21/26Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network
    • G01C21/34Route searching; Route guidance
    • G01C21/36Input/output arrangements for on-board computers
    • G01C21/3602Input other than that of destination using image analysis, e.g. detection of road signs, lanes, buildings, real preceding vehicles using a camera
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C21/00Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
    • G01C21/26Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network
    • G01C21/34Route searching; Route guidance
    • G01C21/36Input/output arrangements for on-board computers
    • G01C21/3605Destination input or retrieval
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C21/00Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
    • G01C21/26Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network
    • G01C21/34Route searching; Route guidance
    • G01C21/36Input/output arrangements for on-board computers
    • G01C21/3667Display of a road map
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R11/02Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof
    • B60R11/0264Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof for control means
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0001Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position
    • B60R2011/0003Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position inside the vehicle
    • B60R2011/0007Mid-console
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0001Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position
    • B60R2011/0003Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position inside the vehicle
    • B60R2011/0028Ceiling, e.g. roof rails
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0001Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position
    • B60R2011/0003Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position inside the vehicle
    • B60R2011/0029Floor, e.g. side sills, fire wall
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0042Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by mounting means
    • B60R2011/008Adjustable or movable supports
    • B60R2011/0082Adjustable or movable supports collapsible, e.g. for storing after use
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0042Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by mounting means
    • B60R2011/008Adjustable or movable supports
    • B60R2011/0084Adjustable or movable supports with adjustment by linear movement in their operational position
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0042Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by mounting means
    • B60R2011/008Adjustable or movable supports
    • B60R2011/0085Adjustable or movable supports with adjustment by rotation in their operational position
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0042Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by mounting means
    • B60R2011/008Adjustable or movable supports
    • B60R2011/0092Adjustable or movable supports with motorization

Definitions

  • the present invention analyzes character recognition and the like by imaging means mounted on a moving body such as an automobile, and based on the analysis result, totals costs, outputs the results to a navigation device, and registers position information.
  • the present invention relates to a mobile information processing apparatus for automatically setting a destination and the like. Background art
  • FIG. 46 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cabin of a conventional automobile.
  • 1 is an instrument panel provided at the front of the vehicle interior, and 2 is provided at the center 1a of the instrument panel 1.
  • Audio such as a radio receiver or cassette deck player, CD player, etc.
  • 3 is a dashpad provided in the upper center of the instrument panel 1
  • 4 is a steering wheel provided on the right side of the instrument panel 1.
  • the front wheel 5 is provided with a driver's seat 5a and a passenger's seat 5b, which are arranged side by side.
  • Reference numeral 6 denotes a center console box installed between the driver's seat 5a and the passenger's seat 5b. .
  • the audio 2 is mainly configured to be installed at the center 1 a of the instrument panel 1.
  • navigation devices have begun to spread, and a navigation device body (not shown) has been installed under front seats such as a driver's seat and a passenger seat.
  • the display section that displays the map information output from the navigation device is installed near the center of the instrument panel 1, or the audio installation space is reduced.
  • the display section is placed in the center of the instrument panel 1.
  • the instrument installed above the unit, that is, buried in the dashboard 3, and the instruments that indicate the state of the braking system installed on the driver's seat side of the instrument panel 1 are installed in the instrument. Structures that are designed to be installed in the center of Panel 1 have begun to appear, and such a structure is becoming the mainstream in the future.
  • the display unit when installing the display unit, it is installed above the center of the instrument panel 1, that is, embedded in the dashboard 3, or above the driver's seat 5a or the passenger's seat 5b.
  • Some headrests head support parts are provided with a display unit via a support unit.
  • a monitor is fixed around the ceiling between the front and rear seats so that passengers in the rear can use the monitor to display TV, video, DVD, and other images. Some have done it.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 10-2977391 discloses a method of operating switches, such as an audio device and an air conditioner, which were conventionally installed at the center of the instrument panel 1. What is provided on the center console 6 installed between the seat and the passenger seat is described.
  • FIG. 47 is a main part configuration diagram showing this main part.
  • Fig. 47 1 is an instrument panel provided at the front of the vehicle interior, 3 is a dash board provided at the upper center of the instrument panel 1, and 4 is a right side of the instrument panel 1.
  • the steering wheel 5 is a front seat, and the front seat 5 is provided with a driver's seat 5a and a passenger seat 5b which are arranged side by side.
  • Reference numeral 6 denotes a cell installed between the driver's seat 5a and the passenger's seat 5b.
  • the reference numeral 7 denotes a gear change lever provided at the lower center of the instrument panel 1
  • 8 denotes a display provided at the upper center of the instrument panel 1.
  • the center console box 6 is provided with a lid 6a, and a storage section opened and closed by the lid 6a is formed inside the center console box 6.
  • a switch mounting portion 9 formed in a concave shape is provided in a part of the front of the center console box 6, and a remote control unit 10 is detachably fitted to the switch mounting portion 9. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, a passenger sitting in a driver's seat or a passenger seat of a car can easily perform a switch operation in a normal sitting posture.
  • FIG. 49 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of this device
  • FIG. 50 is a television receiver. It is sectional drawing of the state accommodated in the carrying case.
  • reference numeral 21 denotes a display unit of a television receiver disposed on a surface of a storage case 25 (described later), 22 denotes a bus as a moving body, and 23 denotes a bus.
  • 22 is a seat
  • 2 is a rail provided at the approximate center of the ceiling of the bus 22
  • 25 is a transport case movably suspended on the rail 24
  • 26 is a rail 24 This is a roller section on which the transfer case 25 is slidably supported.
  • the transport case containing passenger service equipment such as a television receiver or articles such as passenger food and drink can easily move in the vehicle.
  • passenger service equipment such as a television receiver or articles
  • passenger food and drink can easily move in the vehicle.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-76893 discloses a vehicle monitoring device in which a monitor is provided inside a vehicle's room mirror main body, and FIG. 51 shows a main configuration of this device.
  • FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view shown in FIG. 52.
  • FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a main part configuration
  • FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of display on the main part.
  • the rearview mirror body 30 is installed on the ceiling surface of the cabin in front of the driver's seat of the vehicle body. It has the function of a rear-view mirror that captures the rear of the vehicle body, and the function of a rear monitor for the rear imaging device that captures the rear of the vehicle body.
  • the structure includes a housing 31, a monitor 32, and a half mirror 33. And a frame 34 and an arm 35.When the monitor 32 is powered on and reverses by gear change, the display shown in Fig. 53 is displayed on the monitor 32. You. In Fig. 53, the screen is divided into two screens on the left and right, the rear image taken with the camera is displayed on the right, and notes are displayed on the left.
  • a rearview mirror (room mirror) is mounted on the ceiling near the driver's seat, and when the driver checks the rear of the vehicle, such as when checking for passing or changing lanes, the rearview mirror reflects the situation behind the vehicle.
  • the driver is able to see behind what is being issued, but if there is something obstructing the rear view in the passenger compartment behind the back-up mirror, it may be difficult for the back-up view to be confirmed by the back-up mirror. is there. For example, if you have a lot of luggage behind the driver's seat like a delivery car, Luggage often blocks the rear view between the mirror and the rear window of the vehicle.
  • this device is equipped with an image pickup device (not shown) at the rear of the vehicle at a position where the field of view behind the vehicle can be sufficiently secured, and an image taken by the image pickup device on the ceiling of the driver's seat of the vehicle. And a reflecting mirror 42 that reflects the image projected by the display device 41 into the driver's field of view.
  • Fig. 55 is an explanatory diagram of the main parts showing the use state of the device. In Fig.
  • a reverse switch 51 that is turned on when the reverse gear of the vehicle is operated
  • a CCD camera 52 that captures the rear blind spot of the vehicle
  • an antenna 53 for receiving TV broadcasts and a TV tuner 54
  • a TV operation switch for rear passengers 55 a liquid crystal display 56 located near the ceiling in the middle of the front and rear seats, and supporting the liquid crystal display from the ceiling of the vehicle, and It is composed of a display drive unit 57 composed of an electric motor that rotates the LCD screen to the driver's seat side and the rear passenger side, and a control unit 58 that controls the operation of these devices. I have.
  • the user when setting a favorite place as a destination while viewing a sightseeing guidebook or the like on the navigation device, the user sets a menu screen consisting of several layers by operating the screen one by one. Was.
  • the sound system since the sound system is installed in the center of the instrument panel, it is especially necessary to change recording media such as cassette tapes, DATs, CDs, MDs, DVDs, etc. Can only be set and operated at the same time, only the driver and passenger seats in the front seats can be set up.Other than the front seated occupants, that is, if the rear seated occupants are seated, There was a problem that the above-mentioned things could not be performed and the convenience of the rear seated occupants was extremely poor.
  • a display means for displaying visual information from a video playback device or the like is installed in the center of the instrument panel. The visibility is high for occupants in the front seat, but is displayed for occupants in the rear seat. There was a problem that visibility was reduced due to leaving the means.
  • the operating means is detached from the device as a remote controller (hereinafter, referred to as a remote controller).
  • a remote controller is detached from the storage location after the remote control operation.
  • the remote control is usually small, so it is difficult to find out where the operating means is, and there is a problem that the user must search for the remote control when operating.
  • audio equipment and video playback equipment are installed in the center of the instrument panel and fixed so that wiring and other connections can be made within the instrument panel.
  • the number of devices to be installed was limited, and it was necessary to select the devices more carefully when installing the devices, which reduced the development of the devices and reduced the convenience for users.
  • an operation means such as a touch panel for operating the display contents of the display means is provided in the center of the instrument panel together with the display means, the operation means is operated when the operation means is operated.
  • the operation means When performing the operation, change the posture from leaning on the seat to the leaning posture. Operation must be performed by hand, or the user must reach for the operation, which makes it difficult to perform the operation easily.
  • some TV receivers are mounted on rails provided on the ceiling of the bus so that they can move in the front-rear direction of the pass. It does not have a relationship with the movement stop position of the receiver, so each time the user uses the position of the TV receiver so that the position corresponds to the seat where the user is sitting, the TV reception There was a problem that the user had to stop while adjusting the movement of the aircraft, which was inconvenient for the user.
  • the rear seat occupant does not use the television receiver, the rear seat is always located alone, which has a problem that it obstructs the driver and other passengers.
  • the protrusion blocks the rear view of the room mirror, making it difficult for the driver to check the rear.
  • the situation was not only when the vehicle was backing up, but also at the start of normal driving, when changing lanes during driving, when making a right or left turn, etc., that is, there was a problem that it occurred when it was necessary to check the rear.
  • a display device that projects an image captured by an imaging device on the ceiling of a driver's seat of a vehicle toward a windshield, and reflects the image projected by the display device so as to enter a driver's field of view.
  • the user When viewing the rear image with the reflector, the user always sees the rear image captured by the imaging device, and when there is no luggage in the back seat etc. in the car That is, even when the rear view is good, the imaging device and the display device are operating. As a result, there is a problem that power consumption is generated and the onboard battery is likely to rise.
  • Another problem was that organizing and processing information such as receipts received when shopping when going out of a car was complicated and often cumbersome.
  • the present invention has been made to solve such a problem, and is provided within a moving body, an imaging unit that captures visible information, a storage unit that stores a plurality of pieces of visible information, and a visible information captured by the imaging unit.
  • Analysis means for comparing and analyzing the visual information stored in the storage means with the display means, display means provided in the movable body, and display control means for displaying the analysis result of the analysis means on the display means. Therefore, the contents of visible information can be easily stored and organized in the moving body Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a mobile information processing device in which the range of use of the device is improved and the convenience of the device is improved.
  • the display means is provided in the center of the front part in the moving body, the imaging means is provided near the display means, and the result photographed by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display means.
  • the occupant in the front seat of the mobile body can store and organize the visible information, and the operability and convenience of the device for the front seat occupant who has a high percentage of seats in the mobile body can be stored and organized. It is an object of the present invention to obtain a mobile information processing device with improved convenience.
  • the present invention provides an arranging means provided at a position sandwiched between a driver's seat and a passenger's seat in a moving body, the arranging means having a display portion, and the arranging means can be moved in the front-back direction of the moving body
  • the imaging means is provided in a part of the arranging means, and the results obtained by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display unit. It is an object of the present invention to provide a mobile information processing device in which even a seated person can use the device without taking an unreasonable posture, thereby improving the operability of the device and improving the convenience for the user. .
  • the display control means when the analysis result of the analysis means is information relating to cost, the display control means performs a display capable of managing the cost, so that the money management normally performed at home can be performed within the moving body. That is, since the management can be performed each time in a mobile body such as when going out, it is possible to obtain an information processing device for a mobile body in which the use range of the device is improved and the convenience of the device is further improved. Aim.
  • the present invention provides an imaging means provided in a moving body, for capturing visible information, a storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of visible information, and the visible information captured by the imaging means and the visible information stored in the storage means.
  • Analysis means for comparing and analyzing the information
  • a navigation system for displaying the current position of the moving object and map information around the current position Since it has a navigation unit and the analysis result of the analysis unit is used for the setting information of the navigation unit, the complicated setting operation can be eliminated and the convenience of the user is improved and the convenience of the device is improved.
  • the purpose is to obtain information processing equipment for mobile objects.
  • the present invention provides a display means for displaying a function available for the setting information of the navigation means based on the contents of the visible information analyzed by the analysis means, and a predetermined function based on the function displayed on the display means. Since the selection means and the selection means are provided, it is possible to eliminate the trouble of the user selecting from all functions, and to improve the convenience of the user by omitting unnecessary operations, and to improve the convenience of the apparatus. To obtain an information processing device for use.
  • the setting information of the navigation means uses the position information as the position information of the destination, so that the destination can be easily set, and It is an object of the present invention to obtain a mobile information processing device with further improved convenience.
  • the display means is provided in the center of the front part in the moving body, the imaging means is provided near the display means, and the result photographed by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display means Since the imaging means and the display means are disposed close to each other, the information displayed on the display unit can be confirmed while photographing with the imaging means, and the information processing apparatus for a mobile object can be improved in convenience for the user.
  • the purpose is to gain.
  • the present invention provides an arranging means having a display portion, which is provided at a position sandwiched between a driver's seat and a passenger's seat in a moving body;
  • the imaging means is provided as part of the arranging means, and the results taken by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display unit. Regardless of the position, it is easy to check the contents displayed on the display while shooting with the imaging means, It is an object of the present invention to obtain a mobile information processing device that further improves the convenience of the mobile device. Disclosure of the invention
  • An information processing apparatus for a moving body includes: an imaging unit provided in the moving body, for capturing visible information; a storage unit for storing a plurality of pieces of visible information; and a visual information and storage unit for capturing the visible information. Since there are provided analysis means for comparing and analyzing the stored visible information, display means provided in the moving object, and display control means for displaying the analysis result of the analysis means on this display means, Since the contents of visible information can be easily stored and organized in the body, the range of use of the device is improved, and the convenience of the device is improved.
  • the display means is provided in the front center portion of the mobile body, the imaging means is provided near the display means, and the image is taken by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means.
  • the result is displayed on the display means, so that the passenger in the front seat of the mobile body can store and organize the visible information, so that the front seat occupants who have a high percentage of seats in the seat in the mobile body The operability and convenience of the device are improved.
  • an information processing apparatus for a moving body is provided at a position sandwiched between a driver's seat and a passenger's seat in the moving body, and has an arrangement unit having a display unit;
  • a guide means is provided to guide the robot so that it can move along the front-rear direction, and the imaging means is provided in a part of the arranging means.
  • the information processing apparatus for a mobile object may be configured such that: If the information is related to expenses, the display control means displays the information so that the expenses can be managed, so that the money management, which was normally performed at home, can be performed within the mobile unit, that is, when the user goes out of the mobile unit. In each case, the money management can be performed, so that the use range of the device is improved, and the convenience of the device is further improved.
  • the information processing apparatus for a mobile object is provided in the mobile object, an imaging unit that captures visible information, a storage unit that stores a plurality of visible information, and a storage unit that stores the visible information captured by the imaging unit.
  • the information processing apparatus for a mobile object includes a display unit that displays a function available for setting information of the navigation unit based on the contents of the visible information analyzed by the analysis unit; A selection means for selecting a predetermined function from the selected functions is provided, so that the user is not required to select from all functions, and unnecessary operations are omitted, thereby improving the convenience for the user. The convenience of is improved.
  • the setting information of the navigation means uses the position information as the position information of the destination. Can be easily set, and the convenience for the user is further improved.
  • the display means is provided in the front center portion of the mobile body, the imaging means is provided near the display means, and the image is taken by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means. Results can be displayed on display Configured, since the arranged near the display means and the imaging means, easier to see the display contents of the display unit while photographing by the imaging means, further t convenience for the user is improved, moving body according to the present invention
  • Information processing device is provided at a position between the driver's seat and the passenger's seat in the moving body, and has an arrangement means having a display unit, and the arrangement means can be moved along the front-rear direction of the moving body.
  • the imaging means is provided as a part of the arranging means, and the results taken by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display unit, so that the user can sit down Regardless of the position, it is easy to check the contents displayed on the display unit while photographing with the imaging means, and the convenience for the user is further improved.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile information processing device and a mobile device arrangement device according to a first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory view of a main part showing a main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 4 is a main part configuration diagram showing the main part configuration of FIG.
  • FIG. 5 is a rear view of a main part showing a rear surface of the main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 6 is a side sectional view of a main part showing a side cross section of the main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of FIG.
  • FIG. 8 is a rear view of a main part showing a rear surface of the main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 9 is a side sectional view of a main part showing a side cross section of the main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 10 is a rear cross-sectional view of a main part showing a rear cross-section of the main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a main part of the mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 12 is an explanatory view of a principal part showing a principal part of FIG.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a mobile information processing apparatus and a mobile information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 1. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation
  • FIG. 14 is a state transition diagram of main parts showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.
  • FIG. 15 is a main part state diagram showing a state of main parts in FIG.
  • FIG. 16 is a main state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.
  • FIG. 17 is a main part state diagram showing a state of main parts in FIG.
  • FIG. 18 is a main state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.
  • FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a main part configuration of a mobile information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of visible information used in FIG. 19.
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the mobile information processing apparatus according to the first embodiment. It is a bird.
  • FIG. 22 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of a mobile device installation device and a mobile body display device according to Embodiment 2.
  • FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing a main part configuration of a display device for a mobile object according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an operation flow of the display device for a mobile object according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 28 is a main part state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.
  • FIG. 29 is a main part state showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG. 22. It is a transition diagram.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device installation device and a mobile device display device according to Embodiment 6.
  • FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of a display device for a moving object according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 is an explanatory view of a principal part showing a principal part of FIG. 30.
  • FIG. 34 is a main part state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG. 33.
  • FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of displaying the visible information output by the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the visible information output by the mobile object display device according to Embodiment 6 is displayed.
  • FIG. 37 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device for a moving object according to Embodiment 7.
  • FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of a display device for a mobile object and a device installation device for the mobile object according to the seventh embodiment.
  • FIG. 39 is an enlarged explanatory view of the display example of FIG. 38.
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 8.
  • FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of FIG. 40.
  • FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an operation flow of the mobile device installation apparatus according to Embodiment 8.
  • FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile object information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 9.
  • FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of FIG. 43.
  • FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow of the operation of the information processing apparatus for a mobile body according to the ninth embodiment.
  • FIG. 46 is a detailed view of a main part showing a main part inside a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 47 is a detailed view of a main part showing a main part inside a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 48 is a configuration diagram showing a configuration of a main part provided in a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 49 is an explanatory view of main parts showing main parts provided in a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a conventional main part.
  • FIG. 51 is an exploded configuration diagram showing an exploded configuration of a main part provided in a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a conventional main part.
  • FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a conventional main part.
  • FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of a main part showing a conventional main part.
  • FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing the entire configuration of the related art. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile information processing device and a mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 1
  • FIG. 2 is a main configuration showing a main configuration of FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory view of a main part showing the main part of FIG.
  • reference numeral 100 denotes an automobile as a moving object.
  • a minivan-type automobile capable of riding six people is used.
  • 101 is a windshield of the automobile 100
  • 102 is an instrument panel made of resin or the like provided in front of the cabin of the automobile 100
  • 103 is an instrument panel.
  • 104 is a steering wheel.
  • reference numeral 105 denotes a dash pad on the upper surface of the instrument panel 102
  • reference numeral 106 denotes a display device provided at a substantially central portion of the instrument panel 102
  • Reference numeral 7 denotes operating units which are provided in a row in a row and are provided at equal intervals.
  • the operating unit 107 is automatically connected to an external contact center by performing a pressing operation in an emergency.
  • An operation unit that activates the emergency call system that reports an emergency situation an operation unit that turns on / off the emergency lamp that transmits an emergency stop to the outside of the vehicle
  • PDA external electronic notebook
  • An operation unit is provided to allow the user to capture the data of the day.
  • Reference numeral 108 denotes a camera as an imaging means
  • reference numeral 109 denotes a storage space to be stored inside when the console unit 200 described later is moved to the forefront
  • reference numeral 110 denotes a center console. It is a rail section as a guide means that is capable of moving the unit 200 in the front-rear direction of the automobile 100, that is, in the direction A or B in FIG.
  • the rail portion 110 has a groove formed therein and is disposed on the floor in the vehicle interior.
  • the bottom of the groove has the same length as the rail 110 in the longitudinal direction. It is formed in the shape of a slit at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and this is the joint portion 111.
  • 120 is a front seat
  • the front seat 120 is composed of a driver seat 121 and a passenger seat 122.
  • 130 is the middle seat, and this middle seat 130 is also the driver side 1 2 1 like the front seat 120, that is, the right seat 1 in FIG. 1 and the passenger seat side 1 2 2, that is, the left seat 13 2 in FIG. 1, and furthermore, although not shown, the middle seat 130
  • the instrument panel 102 controls a central control system, which controls the control of all devices mounted on the vehicle, and display means such as a display.
  • Display control means such as a display.
  • Volume control means for controlling the volume of a speaker for outputting sound
  • engine control means for controlling the operation of the engine mounted on the automobile 100
  • air conditioner control means for controlling the operation of the (air conditioner) are provided.
  • These display control means, volume control means, engine control means, and air conditioner control means are controlled based on operation commands from the central control means.
  • the central control means also performs predetermined operation control on audio equipment, video equipment, and the like provided in the center console unit 200.
  • the operating means 230 As the passenger in the car operates the operating means 230, the CD player, cassette tape player, DVD player, etc. provided in the center console unit 200 operate.
  • the volume of the audible information is controlled based on the command of the central control means, and the sound is output from the loudspeaker.
  • the audible information is controlled in the same manner as described above by controlling the volume of the loudspeaker based on a command from the central control means and outputting sound from the speaker.
  • the visible information is also displayed on the display means 220 based on the command of the central control means, so that the visible information is displayed on the display means 220. It has become.
  • the volume of the speaker is controlled based on a command from the central control means in the same manner as the audible information, and the speaker outputs sound.
  • center console unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 and FIG.
  • FIG. 2 is an overall configuration diagram showing the entire configuration of the center console unit 200
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between the center console unit 200 and the rail unit 110 shown in FIG. FIG.
  • Reference numeral 200 denotes a center console unit, which has a housing 210 of the center console unit and an opening 211 formed in a part of the housing 210.
  • a display 22 which is provided so as to be housed in the housing 2 and protrudes above the upper surface 211 of the housing 210 when used, and a part of the housing 210 as a second display means.
  • An opening 2 13 is formed in the opening 2 13, and is provided so as to be housed in the opening 2 13, and when used, an operating section 2 30 protruding above the upper surface 2 11 of the housing 2 1 0,
  • a storage medium such as a CD, MD, or DVD is inserted into the imaging device.
  • An entrance 243 and a camera 225 as an imaging means attached to the front of the housing 210 It is configured.
  • a plurality of openings 216 are formed in the upper surface 211 of the housing 210, and a memory card such as an IC card can be inserted into each of these openings. It is an entrance, and in this embodiment, five memory cards can be inserted.
  • FIG. 4 shows the display unit 2 which is the main part of the center console unit 200.
  • 20 is a rear perspective view
  • FIG. 5 is a rear view showing the back of the display section 220
  • FIG. 6 is a side sectional view showing a side section of the display section 220.
  • FIG. 7 is an external view of a main part showing an external appearance of an operation part 230 which is a main part of the center console unit 200
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic view of a back surface of the operation part 230 shown in FIG. 9 is a side cross-sectional view showing a side cross-section of the operation unit 230
  • FIG. 10 is a front cross-sectional view showing a front cross-section of the operation unit 230.
  • a drive mechanism for the display section 220 is provided below the support section 222 of the display section 220.
  • the drive mechanism includes a comb-like section 22 having a joint section 230 on one surface. 3 is provided in the housing portion 210 so as to mate with the joint portion 2 23 a formed on the comb-like portion 2 23, and the joint portion 224 a is formed partially.
  • Drive unit 2 24 is provided below the support section 222 of the display section 220.
  • the drive mechanism includes a comb-like section 22 having a joint section 230 on one surface. 3 is provided in the housing portion 210 so as to mate with the joint portion 2 23 a formed on the comb-like portion 2 23, and the joint portion 224 a is formed partially.
  • Drive unit 2 24 is provided below the support section 222 of the display section 220.
  • the drive mechanism includes a comb-like section 22 having a joint section 230 on one surface. 3 is provided in the housing portion 210 so as to mate with the joint portion 2 23 a formed on the
  • the joining portion 2 24 a of the driving portion 2 24 and the joining portion 2 2 3 a of the comb portion 2 2 3 are joined together, and the driving portion 2
  • the shape part 2 23 also moves up and down in the H direction or the G direction.
  • the inside of the housing part 210 has a hollow shape like a fault, one end of which is fixed to the upper surface 211 of the housing part 210, and the other end is a single layer of the housing part 210.
  • Bar-shaped support portions 225 and 226 fixed to the upper surface 216 of the eye and supporting the display portion 220 are provided.
  • these rod-shaped support portions 2 25 and 2 26 are fitted into holes 22 a and 22 b formed in the support portion 222 of the display portion 220, respectively. It is intended to prevent wobbling of 20.
  • the display surface side of the display section .220 is disposed on the left side of the comb section 223, that is, on the rear side in the automobile.
  • An operation surface 2 31 of the operation unit 230 is provided with an air conditioner operation unit 2 32 for operating operation of an air conditioner (not shown) provided in the automobile, and a display unit for performing a predetermined operation.
  • a drive mechanism of the operation unit 230 is formed on the back surface 236 of the operation unit 230, and the drive mechanism is formed in an arc shape and has a joint portion on one surface. It is composed of a comb-shaped part 237 formed with 237a, and a drive part 238 provided in the housing part 210 and partially formed with a coupling part 238a. ing.
  • a rotation shaft (not shown) is fitted into a part, and a fulcrum when the operation part 230 projects from the housing part 210 or is stored in the housing part 210.
  • the bearings 239a and 239b are formed, and on the opposite side of the bearings 239a and 239b, the operation unit 230 is attached to the housing unit 210.
  • Locking portions 239c and 239d are formed to lock with locking portions 211a formed inside the housing portion 210 so as not to come off.
  • the operation part 230 is formed by combining the joint part 238a of the drive part 238 with the joint part 237a of the comb-like part 237.
  • the comb-shaped portion 223 is also moved by drawing an arc in the J direction or the I direction by the rotation drive of the 8 in the I direction or the J direction.
  • the display 220 moves in the H direction depending on the position of the housing section 210 on the rail section 110 and moves from the top surface 211 of the housing section 210 to the display 2.
  • the display surface 2 21 of 20 is projected or moved in the G direction to be housed in the housing 2 10, and
  • the operation unit 230 also moves in the I direction depending on the position of the housing unit 210 on the rail unit 110, and moves from the upper surface 211 of the housing unit 210 to the operation unit 2
  • the 30 operation surface 2 31 is configured to protrude or move in the J direction to be housed in the housing 2 10.
  • the lower surface 215 of the housing portion 210 has a structure formed in a groove inside the rail portion 110.
  • a rotatable wheel portion 201 having a joint portion 202 formed on a peripheral surface portion to be engaged with the stop portion 1.1.1 is provided, and the wheel portion 201 has a drive unit (not shown). Is built in, and the wheel unit 201 rotates by the rotation of the driving unit.
  • the center console unit 200 moves in the A or B direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 2, when the wheel unit 201 rotates in the G direction based on a command from the operation unit, the center console unit 200 moves in the A direction, and conversely, the wheel unit When the unit 201 rotates in the H direction, the center console unit 200 moves in the B direction. On the other hand, when there is no rotation of the drive unit, the wheel unit 201 becomes the rail unit 1 1. Since it is coincident with 0, it does not move in either the A direction or the B direction, and the center console unit 200 is positioned at the stop position of the drive unit.
  • the center console unit 200 When the center console unit 200 is not used, the center console unit 200 is accommodated in the space 110 as shown in FIG. Initial position of 0).
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a main part for controlling the operation of the mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 1
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the main parts of FIG. 11.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the operation flow of the mobile device installation apparatus according to Embodiment 1. First, the main configuration for controlling the operation of the center console unit 200 will be described. I do.
  • Reference numerals 241, 242 denote operation units.When the center console unit 200 is moved in the direction A shown in FIG. 1, the operation unit 241 is pressed and when the center console unit 200 is moved in the B direction. By performing a pressing operation on the operation unit 242, a predetermined command signal is output.
  • a predetermined command signal is output.
  • a setting value selecting means 1101, described later determines the setting position of the center-consol unit 200.
  • This set value selection means 1 101 sets a predetermined setting from the movement set value stored in the storage means 110 (described later) based on the command signal output from the operation units 24 1 and 24 2. Select a value and output this set value. 1102 is provided in the center and console unit 200, in the direction and distance in which the wheel unit 201 moves, at each of the positions of the seats 120 and 130 provided in the car interior. The set value of whether or not the display unit 220 projects from the upper surface of the center console unit 200, and the operation unit 230 provided on the center console unit 200 are displayed on the center console unit 200.
  • the center console 200 has five fixed positions, and the first position The station is in the initial position, and the console unit 200 is stored in the storage space 109, and is located at the forefront of the rail section 110. For this reason, the movement setting value of the center console unit 200 is set to 0 cm at the first position, the display unit 220 is housed in the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 is also in the housing unit 2. Stored in 10. This first position does not correspond to any seating position.
  • the second position is a position corresponding to the driver's seat, and a movement setting value for moving by 5 cm in the direction A shown in Fig. 1 based on the first position is set, and the display unit 220 is the housing unit 21.
  • the operation unit 230 is housed in the housing unit 0 so as to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 so as to have a predetermined inclination angle 0.
  • the third position is a position corresponding to the passenger seat, and a movement set value for moving by 15 cm in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the first position is set. Is projected from the upper surface of the housing portion 210, and the operation portion 230 is also projected from the upper surface of the housing portion 210 so as to have a predetermined inclination.
  • the fourth position is a position corresponding to the middle seat, and a movement set value for moving 60 cm in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the first position is set.
  • the operation section 230 is configured to protrude from the upper surface of the housing section 210. In this case, the fourth position corresponds to both the left and right middle seats.
  • the fifth position is for rear seats, and a movement set value for moving 120 cm in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the first position is set.
  • the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are configured to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210.
  • the fourth position corresponds to both the left and right rear seats.
  • These first to fifth positions are determined by the number of consecutive operations within a predetermined time of the operation means 241 and 242 provided in the center console unit 200.
  • the console unit 200 is set to the first position, if there are three consecutive pressing operations on the operating means 241, the second and third positions are passed to the fourth Set to position.
  • the center console unit 200 is in this state, that is, in the fourth position, if the operating means 242 is subjected to two consecutive pressing operations, it passes through the third position to the second position. It is set to the position.
  • the center-console unit 200 when it is moved for each position, it is as follows. That is, when the center-console unit 200 is not used, the center-console unit 200 is housed in the lower center of the instrument panel as shown in FIG.
  • the operation state of the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 of the center console unit 200 is as shown in FIG.
  • the wheel part 201 rotates and the first part is moved from the first position. Move to the position shown in Fig. 16 corresponding to the driver's seat (second position).
  • the operation states of the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 of the center console unit 200 are as shown in FIG.
  • the center unit console 200 is automatically set to the initial position shown in Fig. 14 as the first position, regardless of the position set when the power of the moving object is turned off to 0 FF. It is supposed to.
  • 1103 shown in FIG. 11 is a movement set value selected from the storage means 1102 shown in FIG. 5 outputted from the set value selection means, and a display section setting as a display means protrusion set value.
  • the center console unit 200 is moved according to the movement set value based on the operation unit setting value as the operation value and the operation means protrusion setting value, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are moved to the housing unit 2.
  • Movement control means protruding from the upper surface of the housing 10 or housed in the housing portion 210, and 1104 is a center-to-console unit 20 based on the control signal output by the movement control means 110. 0 in the direction A or B shown in Fig.
  • This moving means 111 is a wheel part 201, a joint part 202 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the wheel part 201, A drive unit (not shown) built into the wheel unit 201, a rail unit 110, a locking unit 111 formed in the groove of the rail unit 110, and a display unit 22 0 drive mechanism and the drive mechanism of the operation unit 230.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the operation of the mobile device installation device of the first embodiment, and the operation of this device will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the operation standby state is set (step 1300), and the operation is started.
  • the set value selecting means 1101 has been operated in the direction A shown in FIG. 1, that is, whether or not the operation section 2241 of the center console unit 200 has been pressed.
  • the setting value selection means 1 101 It is determined how many times the pressing operation (1) has been performed within a predetermined time (for example, within 2 seconds) (step 1302), and it is provided in the housing and the center-to-console unit 200 is currently set.
  • the set value selecting means 1101 extracts the contents stored in a storage unit (not shown) for constantly updating and storing the position (step 1303).
  • step 1304 based on the contents of step 1302, it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 force S1 position has been moved (step 1304). If it is determined that the position has been moved, the setting value selecting means 1101 sets the center console unit 2 corresponding to the position obtained by adding one position to the current position based on the contents of step 1303.
  • the movement control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 111, and outputs an operation control signal to the movement means 110104 so as to perform a predetermined movement operation.
  • step 1306 If so, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1306). After the operation of step 1306, the operation returns to step 1301, the operation units 241, 2442 enter an operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 1301 is as described above. It will be the same. '
  • step 13304 it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 is a movement of two positions (step 1307). If it is determined in step 1307 that the movement is two positions, the setting value selection means 1101, based on the contents of step 133, sets the center corresponding to the position obtained by adding two positions to the current position.
  • the moving direction and moving distance of the console unit 200, the display unit setting value indicating whether or not the display unit 220 protrudes from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 by the housing The operation unit setting value for whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of the unit 210 is selected and output to the movement control means 1103 (step 13008).
  • the movement control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1101, and performs a predetermined movement operation. (2) Output an operation control signal to the moving means 111 to move the center console unit 200 and make the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 protrude. ). After the operation of step 1309, the process returns to step 1301, and the operation units 241, 242 become ready for operation, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above. .
  • Step 13 07 it is determined whether or not the set value selecting means 1101 is for movement for three positions.
  • Step 1310 determines that three positions have been moved, the setting value selection means 1101 changes to the current position based on the contents of step 1303.
  • the moving direction and moving distance of the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding the three positions, and the display unit setting value indicating whether or not the display unit 220 is to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210.
  • the operation section setting value for determining whether or not the operation section 230 is projected from the upper surface of the housing section 210 is selected and output to the movement control means 1103 (step 1311).
  • the movement control means 1 103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 101 and controls the movement of the movement means 1 104 so as to perform a predetermined movement operation.
  • a signal is output to move the center console unit 200, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 2 3 Protrude 0 (step 1 3 1 2).
  • the process returns to step 1301, and the operation section 2411 and 2442 are in an operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above. .
  • step 13 03 If it is not determined in step 13 03 that the movement is 3 positions, the setting value selection means 1 101 determines that the movement is 4 positions, and the setting is made based on the contents of step 13 03.
  • the value selecting means 1101 moves the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding four positions to the current position, the moving direction and the moving distance, and the display unit 220 is a housing unit 210.
  • Step 13 13 Display unit setting value to determine whether to protrude from the upper surface of the housing and operation unit setting value to determine whether to protrude the operating unit 230 from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and perform movement control means 1 1 0 3 (Step 13 13), and after the processing of Step 13 3, the movement control means 1 103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 101 and performs the predetermined movement operation.
  • step 1 3 14 After the operation of step 1 3 14, the process returns to step 1 3 0 1, and the operation units 2 4 1 and 2 4 2 are in the operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 13 0 1 is the same as described above. .
  • step 1301 the set value selection means 1 101 operates in the direction B shown in FIG. 1, that is, whether the operation section 242 of the center-to-console unit 200 is pressed. (Steps 1315), and if it is determined in this step 1315 that the operation of the operation section 242 has been performed, the setting value selection means 1101 is operated by the operation section 242. It is determined how many times the pressing operation has been performed within a predetermined period of time (for example, within 2 seconds) (step 1316), and it is installed in the housing and is currently set in the center unit console 200. Set the storage contents of the storage unit (provided inside the set value selection means 1101, which determines the movement set value etc. by comparing with this storage unit) that constantly updates and stores the current position.
  • a predetermined period of time for example, within 2 seconds
  • the value selection means 1 101 extracts (step 13 17). Next, based on the contents of step 1317, it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 moves by one position (step 1318), and in this step 1318, one position is determined. If it is determined that the position has moved, the set value selecting means 1101 sets the center console unit 20 corresponding to the position obtained by subtracting one position from the current position based on the contents of steps 1317. 0 moving direction and moving distance, display unit setting values indicating whether or not the display unit 220 protrudes from the top surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 on the top surface of the housing unit 210.
  • step 1319 From the operation unit to determine whether to protrude from the control unit and output it to the movement control means 1103 (step 1319) (step 1319).
  • the movement control means 11 0 3 receives the output from the set value selecting means 1 1 0 1, and controls the moving means 1 1 0 4 to perform a predetermined moving operation.
  • Control signal is output to move center console unit 200 and display unit 220 and operation unit 230 are set if they are set to protrude. If the set value is to be stored in the housing section 210, it is stored in the housing section 210 (step 1320). After the operation of step 1320, the operation returns to step 1301, and the operation units 241 and 2442 are in an operation standby state.
  • the operation processing after step 1301 is as described above. It will be the same.
  • step 1318 it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 is a movement of two positions (step 1312). If it is determined that the position is moved by 2 positions in 1 3 2 1, based on the contents of step 13 17, the setting value selection unit 1 1 0 1 sets the center corresponding to the position obtained by adding 2 positions to the current position.
  • step 3 2 After the processing in step 1 32 2, the movement control means 1 103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 101 and performs a predetermined movement operation. A motion control signal is output to the control unit 04 to move the center console unit 200 and, if the set value causes the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 to protrude, the unit is protruded. If the set value is to be stored in 10, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1332). After the operation of step 1 3 2 3, return to step 1
  • step 1 3 2 1 If it is not determined in step 1 3 2 1 that the movement is 2 positions, it is determined whether or not the setting value selection means 1 101 is a 3 position movement (step 1 3 2 4). If it is determined that the position has been moved by 3 positions in 1 3 2 4, the setting value selection 1101 is the moving direction and distance of the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding 3 positions to the current position, and the display section 220 is viewed from the top of the housing section 210. A display unit setting value indicating whether or not to protrude and an operation unit setting value indicating whether or not the operation unit 230 is to be protruded from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 are selected and provided to the movement control unit 1103. Output (Step 1
  • step 1 3 2 After the processing of step 1 3 2 5, the movement control means 1 1 0 3 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 1 0 1 and performs a predetermined movement operation. The operation control signal is output to 4 and the center console unit 200 is moved, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded if they are set to protrude. If the set value is to be stored in 0, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1326). After the operation of step 1 3 2 6, return to step 1
  • step 1324 determines that the movement is 4 positions, and the setting is performed based on the contents of step 1317.
  • the value selection means 1 101 sets the moving direction and moving distance of the send / receive console 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding 4 positions to the current position, and the display unit 220 serves as the housing unit 2.
  • Movement control means by selecting a display unit setting value as to whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of 10 and an operation unit setting value as to whether or not the operation unit 230 is to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 Output to 1103 (step 1327), and after the processing of step 1327, the movement control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 110101 and A movement control signal is output to the moving means 1104 to move the center console unit 200 so that the center console unit 200 moves. And store the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 (step 1 328). After the operation in step 1328, the process returns to step 1301, and the operation units 24 1 and 242 are in an operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as that described above.
  • step 1315 If the setting value selecting unit 1101 determines that the operation unit 422 has not been operated in step 1315, the process returns to step 1301, and the operation unit 241 and 242 wait for operation. In this state, the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above.
  • a mobile information processing device using cameras 108 and 250 as imaging means is provided.
  • the body information processing apparatus will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, and 19 to 21.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile information processing device using cameras 108 and 250
  • FIG. 20 is a photographing target using a power camera as a main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an operation flow of the information processing apparatus for a mobile object shown in FIG. 18.
  • Reference numeral 108 denotes a camera provided as an imaging means provided on the instrument panel 102
  • reference numeral 250 denotes a camera provided as an imaging means provided on the front surface of the center console unit 100.
  • These cameras 108 and 250 have the same function, and hold the object to be photographed in front of the cameras 108 and 250 to photograph visible information.
  • the contents are the contents issued from the store when the product is purchased, the insert of the newspaper, the tourist guidebook, and the like.
  • These information sources are captured by the cameras 108 and 250, and displayed on the display unit 106 provided on the instrument panel 102 and the display unit 220 provided on the center console unit 200. ing.
  • 90 1 is the visible information that was taken with the camera 108 and 250 and output Analyzing means for comparing and analyzing dictionary information indicating visible information for analyzing the visible information captured by the cameras 108 and 250 stored in the storage means described later
  • 19 Numeral 0 2 is storage means for storing dictionary information as visible information to be compared when the analyzing means 1901 analyzes the contents of the visible information captured by the cameras 108 and 250.
  • This storage means 1902 stores dictionary information necessary for recognizing characters such as figures, symbols, alphabets, hiragana, katakana, kanji, and numbers.
  • Reference numeral 1903 denotes display control means for outputting the analysis result of the analysis means 1901 to the display means 106 and 220, and controlling the display so as to display the information. Is composed of these.
  • FIG. 20 shows a display example of a receipt issued at a store, where 2001 is the store name, 2002 is the address (address) of the store, 2003 is the purchase date, and 200 4 is the name of the item to be paid, and 2005 is the breakdown of the payment.
  • Each piece of information 200 1 to 200 5 used in FIG. 20 is photographed by the camera 108 or the camera 250, and the photographed contents are stored in the storage means 1902.
  • the analysis means 1901 performs analysis, that is, recognizes the character information and the like of each piece of information 201 to 205, and displays the recognition result (analysis result) on the display unit 1 0 6 is displayed on the display unit 220.
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation of the mobile information processing apparatus.
  • the apparatus enters a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation on the apparatus (step 210), and the operation is started.
  • the analyzing means 1901 determines whether or not the visible information has been read from the camera 108 or the camera 250 (step 2101), and the visible information is read in this step 201. If it is determined that the information corresponding to the visible information read by the camera from the storage means 190 It is then selected and extracted and analyzed (step 210).
  • the display control means 1903 determines whether or not the result analyzed in step 2102 has been output from the analysis means 1901 (step 2103). If it is determined that the analysis result has been output in step, the result is displayed on the display unit 106 or the display unit 220 (step 210).
  • step 210 After the processing of step 210 is completed, the process returns to step 211 again to be in a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation, and the same processing as described above is performed after step 210.
  • the analyzing means 1901 determines that the visible information has not been read in step 2101, it returns to step 2101 again, and enters a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation. 01 and below, the same processing as above is performed.
  • step 210 If it is determined in step 210 that the analysis result is not output, the process returns to step 210 again to be in a standby state until the analysis result is output.
  • the operating unit for operating these devices and the display means for displaying the visual information of these devices as images can be housed in the arranged arrangement means, and the center console unit 200 which can be protruded is railed. It is possible to move along the section 110, and set the movement setting value of the center console unit 200, the projection setting value of the display section 220, and the projection setting value of the operation section 230 corresponding to each seat.
  • the center console unit 200 can be used properly according to the operation contents, so that any occupant in any seat can access the audio equipment and video playback equipment at the appropriate position. Operable Will, on the basis of the operation, Se The center console unit 200 is automatically moved to the position corresponding to the occupant of each seat, so that the user does not have to decide the position of the center console unit 200 while making fine adjustments. Since the position is automatically set to the optimum position, the trouble of the setting operation is eliminated, and the convenience for the user is improved. That is, the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 can be automatically protruded upward or stored by only operating the operation unit, so that such a troublesome operation can be eliminated. The convenience of the system is improved.
  • Embodiment 2 In addition, visible information such as receipts issued by stores can be read by a camera installed in the car, and the results of this analysis can be displayed on a display unit installed in the car, improving user convenience. I do. Embodiment 2
  • a mobile device arrangement device according to another embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described.
  • a mobile device installation device using a mobile display device is used.
  • the rail section 110 and the center console unit 200 are described as being provided on the floor (floor section) in the automobile.
  • the console unit 200 may be provided on the ceiling in the automobile.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device disposition device using the mobile device display device according to the second embodiment, wherein 1 2 1 is a driver's seat, and 1 2 2 is a passenger seat. 131, a right middle seat located behind the driver's seat, and 132 a left middle seat located behind the passenger seat and to the left of the right middle seat.
  • Reference numeral 2200 denotes a ceiling in the interior of the car, and the ceiling 2200 has a room mirror 2 210 as a first display means and seats 1 2 1 and 1 disposed on the right side.
  • a rail section 2202 is provided as a guide means provided in the front-rear direction of the vehicle, and is guided by the rail section 220, and can move in the A direction or the B direction as in FIG.
  • a center console unit 230 accommodating a plurality of audio devices and video reproduction devices is provided.
  • the rearview mirror 222 is provided on the ceiling in front of the driver's seat 121, and has a function to display the situation behind the vehicle and the interior of the vehicle. The exterior is as shown in Fig. 23. It is.
  • the rear field of view of the room mirror 2 210 is indicated by a broken line.
  • the rail portion 222 has a groove formed therein, and the opening of the groove portion is formed to be shorter than the groove portion.
  • a locking portion for locking with a joint formed on the wheel portion of the center console unit 230 is formed.
  • the drive motor is rotated to rotate the wheels, and the sensor console 2 230 is moved in the A direction or the B direction. I have.
  • the cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the rail section 222 and the center console unit 230 has the same mechanism as that of FIG. 50 described in the background art.
  • Reference numeral 2230 denotes a center console unit.
  • An opening is formed in the housing 2240 of the center console unit, and an opening is formed in a part of the housing 2240, and is housed in the opening.
  • a display section as a second display means that protrudes below the lower surface of the housing section during use. 50, an operation unit 2260 provided on the rear surface (front side in FIG. 22) of the housing 2240, and an audio device provided in the housing 2240.
  • Reference numeral 2280 denotes a camera provided on the lower surface of the console unit 230 and serves as an image pickup means for capturing images of the rear and surroundings of the vehicle and the interior of the vehicle. It is configured to be rotatable in the 360 ° direction so that the direction can be photographed.
  • the camera 2280 is normally held at a position where the rear of the car can be photographed.
  • a plurality of openings 2 242 are formed in the lower surface 224 of the housing 224, and a memory such as an IC card is formed in the plurality of openings 224.
  • a memory such as an IC card is formed in the plurality of openings 224.
  • Each of the cards has an insertion slot into which a card can be inserted. In the present embodiment, five memory cards can be inserted.
  • the display unit 222 moves in the C direction from the lower surface of the housing 220, depending on where the housing 220 is located on the rail 220.
  • the display section 222 is configured to protrude or move in the direction D to be housed in the housing section 240.
  • center console unit 230 When the center console unit 230 is not used, it is moved to the forefront in the car as shown in Fig. 28 (center console unit 230). Initial position).
  • the difference from FIG. 1 described in the first embodiment is that the center unit console unit 230 is upside down, and the operation unit 222 is It is provided on the front side of the console unit 222 and is not configured to be housed in the housing 222 as described in the first embodiment.
  • a camera capable of rotating 360 ° is provided on the lower surface 222 of the body portion 222.
  • FIG. 23 The configuration of the room mirror 222 is the same as the configuration described in FIGS. 51 and 52 described in the background art.
  • the room mirror 2 2 10 usually has a mirror (mirror) surface 2 2 12, and the rear image is projected on the entire surface of the mirror surface 2 2 1 2.
  • the liquid crystal unit not shown
  • a part of the mirror surface 2221 The display section 2 2 13 of the liquid crystal section is displayed, and the rear image actually shot by the camera 2280 is displayed as shown in FIG.
  • Reference numeral 2 211 denotes a support unit for attaching the room mirror 222 to the ceiling 220 of the automobile 100. Note that the support portion 2 211 may be attached to the upper part of the windshield 101, instead of being attached to the ceiling portion 220.
  • reference numeral 2250 denotes a display portion formed so as to be able to protrude / retract from the center console unit 2230 as the second display means
  • 2601 denotes whether or not the display portion 250 is protruding. That is, the storage state determination means for determining the storage state of the display section 250 based on the display section set value selected by the set value selection section shown in FIG. 11 described in the first embodiment. 2 is the storage state judgment Based on the result determined by the means 2 261, it is a display control means for outputting an operation command to an imaging means 228 0 and a first display means 222, which will be described later.
  • the storage state determining means determines that the display section 220 is housed in the housing section 240, the display section 220 and the first display section 222 are determined. If it is determined that the display unit 2250 protrudes downward from the lower surface 2241 of the housing 2240 without outputting an operation command, the imaging unit 2280 and the first display unit are determined. An operation command is output to 2 210.
  • a photographing operation is started, and a camera 280 such as a CCD camera as an imaging means for outputting a captured image, and a display control means 2602
  • the room mirror 2 210 as the first display means that operates to display an image output from the camera 2 280 based on the operation command output from the camera 2, and the room mirror is in the conductive state. 23, the state shown in FIG. 23 is reached, and when an image is output from the camera 228, this image is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 221, as shown in the state shown in FIG. Display in 3.
  • the operation of the camera 2280 and the imaging means 2280 take a picture depending on the storage state of the display unit 2250 provided in the center console unit 2230.
  • the image was displayed on the display unit 222, it may be as follows, and FIG. 27 includes these components.
  • the operating means 2603 is provided near the driver's seat 121, and when the operating means 2603 is operated, the display unit 2205 provided on the center console unit 230 is provided. Regardless of whether or not 0 is protruded and stored, an operation command is output to the camera 2280 and the room mirror 2210, and the image captured by the camera 2280 is output to the room mirror. 2 2 1 0 It is displayed on the display section of the liquid crystal section. For this reason, when the display section 2250 of the center console unit 2230 is stored in the housing section 2240, the driver can view the video taken by the camera 2280. This is useful when you want to display on a room mirror.
  • the camera 2202 is configured to be capable of rotating 360 °, so that the shooting direction of the camera 222 can be changed according to the user's preference. That is, a photographing direction changing means 2604 that changes the photographing direction of the camera 2280 is provided in the vicinity of the driver's seat 1221, and the normal direction of the camera 2280 is the rearward direction. However, for example, when the driver wants to see the desired direction, the direction of the camera 228 can be changed by simply operating the driver.
  • the camera's shooting direction can be changed by controlling the rotation of the camera 2280 while the pressing operation on the shooting direction changing means 2604 is continuously performed, or by changing the shooting direction changing means 2
  • the rotation in the clockwise direction by 2 ° per one operation on the 604 may be performed.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation of the second embodiment.
  • step 2700 when the power of the automobile is turned on, the operation of the apparatus is started (step 2700), and first, the storage state judging means 2601 is connected to the housing 2 of the center console unit 2230. It is determined whether or not the display unit 2250 is stored in 40 (step 2701), and in this step 2701, the display unit 2250 is replaced with the housing unit 2240.
  • the storage state determination means 2601 determines that the display protrudes downward from the lower surface 2240 of the camera
  • the display control means 2602 The camera 2 280 and the display 2 2 13 are operated by turning on the display 2 2 1 3 of the liquid crystal section provided.
  • Step 2 7 0 2 receiving the step 2 7 0 2, captures an image in the direction that the camera 2 2 8 0 is facing (Step 2 7 0 3), and captures the image in this step 2 7 0 3
  • the displayed image is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 222 (step 2704).
  • step 274 After the processing in step 274, the process returns to step 2701, and the same processing as described above is repeated.
  • step 2701 the storage state determining means 2601 does not protrude the display unit 225 into the housing unit 224 of the center console unit 230, that is, the storage state. If it is determined that the display is turned on, the display control means 2602 keeps the liquid crystal portion of the camera 220 and the room mirror 2201 non-conductive, and the room mirror 2201 The entire surface of 2 2 1 1 functions as a mirror (step 2705). After the processing of step 275, the flow returns to step 2701 again, and the processing is repeated.
  • the movement operation of the center console unit 2230 is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, that is, the case where the center console unit 2230 is moved for each position is as follows.
  • the center console unit 2 230 When the center console unit 2 230 is not used, the center console unit 2 230 is located at the front center of the ceiling 2 200 and the rail 2 2 as shown in Fig. 28.
  • the display section is supported in the groove section 20 and the display section is housed in the housing section 230 (first position).
  • the center console unit 2 230 has four installation positions, but it may have five positions as in the first embodiment.
  • the center console unit 2230 automatically moves to the initial position shown in Fig. 28 as the first position when the power of the moving object is turned off, regardless of the position set. It has become.
  • a rail section 222 is provided on each of the floor and ceiling of the car, and depending on the intended use, the center console unit 230 can be mounted on either rail section 222. It may be configured so that it can be replaced with.
  • the floor (floor portion) of the vehicle is provided. It is a moving object that cannot be used, that is, a moving object whose floor is a passage for passengers.For example, a bus, a train, an airplane, or the like can provide an environment in which the above-described device can be used. The range of use is improved, and the limited space in the moving body can be effectively used.
  • a camera as an imaging means for mainly capturing a rear image is provided in the center console unit 230, and the display unit 250 of the console unit 220 is positioned downward.
  • the part of the broken line shown in Fig. 22 which is the rear view of the room mirror 220 is blocked by the display section 250. Therefore, the rear view deteriorates, but in this case, the rear image captured by the camera is displayed on the display of the liquid crystal unit provided in a part of the room mirror 2201.
  • Embodiment 2 has been described as being limited to the case where the floor of the car cannot be used, it goes without saying that the present device may be used even when the floor of the car can be used. .
  • Embodiments 1 and 2 described above it has been described that the set values shown in FIG. 12 are stored in the storage means 1102, but these set values are used as initial set values.
  • the configuration may be such that the user can change it as appropriate, and this configuration further improves the convenience for the user.
  • the display unit 220 provided in the center console unit 200 only moves vertically, but the display surface and the support unit 2 of the display unit 220 are described.
  • a direction adjustment mechanism that can adjust the direction of the display unit 220 in the up, down, left, and right directions may be provided between the display unit 21 and the display unit 2.
  • the center console unit 220 provided on the ceiling 220 is guided by the rail 220 provided on the ceiling 220 so that the automobile
  • the same mobile device arrangement device as in the first embodiment is provided so as to be movable on the floor in the vehicle,
  • the display device for the mobile object may be fixedly provided at a predetermined location on the ceiling, for example, between the front seat and the middle seat provided in the automobile as shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a mobile device arrangement device and a mobile object display according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of the device
  • FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a main part configuration of FIG. 30,
  • FIG. 32 is a flow chart of an operation of the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the display unit, which is the main part of FIG. 30, is housed in the housing
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the display, which is the main part of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state accommodated in the body part.
  • a rail section 110 provided between a driver's seat and a passenger's seat is provided on the floor of a car 100, and is guided in the groove of the rail section to move in the A or B direction.
  • a mobile device arrangement device composed of a center and console unit 200 that operates, and a room mirror that is installed above the driver's seat and that displays mainly rearward images is mounted on the ceiling 220.
  • a display device for a mobile object which is composed of a display unit 222 and a display unit 30000 mainly used by a passenger in a rear seat from a front seat.
  • the display unit 3100 includes a housing section 310 in which a storage section 3201 in which a display section 3200 (described later) is partially stored is formed, and the housing section 3101.
  • the display section 3 0 2 0 can be stored in the storage section 3 0 2 1 and the display section 3 0 2 0 projects the display surface downward while releasing the locking section 3 0 1 2 when the user uses it.
  • the camera is provided behind the unit 320 (in FIG. 30, on the near side), and includes a camera 3030 as an imaging unit capable of capturing an image in a 360 ° direction based on a command.
  • reference numeral 3100 denotes a first communication unit provided with a transmission unit 3101 and a reception unit 3102 for transmitting a command from outside the vehicle, and the first communication unit 3100 includes:
  • the display unit 310 is provided as third display means for displaying the visible information received by the receiving unit 310.
  • Reference numeral 310 denotes a first pass of video information captured by the imaging means 3120 described later. Reception receiving the signal transmitted from the transmission unit 3 1 1 1 transmitting to the reception unit 3 1 0 2 of the communication unit 3 1 0 0 and the transmission unit 3 1 0 1 of the first communication unit 3 1 0 0 This is a second communication means provided with the units 3 1 and 1 2.
  • the receiving unit 3 1 1 2 of the second communication unit 3 1 1 2 receives the designated signal transmitted from the transmitting unit 3 1 0 1, and the imaging unit 3 0 3 via the operation unit 2 6 3 Conduction is made to the imaging means 300 so that 0 captures an image.
  • this command is also transmitted from the transmission unit 3101, so The direction changing means 2604 instructs the photographing direction of the imaging means 3030.
  • the imaging means 3 0 3 0 shoots in a predetermined direction, outputs the shot video information to the transmitting section 3 1 1 1 of the second communication means, and outputs the information from the transmitting section 3 1 1 1 to the first communication. Transmit to means 3100.
  • the receiving section 3102 of the first communication means 3100 receives the transmission signal, and based on this reception, displays the video taken by the imaging means 310 on the third display means 31 0 3 is displayed.
  • the first communication means 3100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.
  • FIG. 35 shows a case where a mobile phone 350 is used as the first communication means 310, and the mobile phone 350 has a display section 3501 as a third display means. And an operation unit 3502 for outputting a command signal to the second communication means 3200.
  • mobile phone 350 Inside 0, a transmission section 3501 and a reception section 3502 are provided. The content displayed on the display section 3510 is obtained by shooting with the shooting direction of the camera 3030 being forward.
  • FIG. 36 shows a personal computer (hereinafter, referred to as a personal computer) 360, used as the first communication means 310, and the personal computer body 360, and the personal computer body. It is composed of a display section 3620 that displays information from the 3601 and a keyboard 3606 that is an operation section for performing operations on the personal computer 3601.
  • the PC 3601 is provided with a communication adapter for communicating with the outside, and the communication adapter has the functions of the transmitting unit 3501 and the receiving unit 3502. are doing.
  • the content displayed on the display surface 3621 of the display section 3620 is the same as that shown in Fig. 35, and the camera 3030 is shot with the shooting direction in front.
  • the normal imaging means 3030 turns on the indication which is a power operation of the car, and the operation is controlled based on the stored state of the second display means 222, but the operation means 26 It is configured to be in a conductive state when there is a command via the imaging direction changing means 26 and the imaging direction changing means 26.
  • the operation is started in the initial state (step 3200), and it is determined whether or not the indication is "FF" or "ON” (step 3201). If it is determined in this step 3201 that the indication is OFF.
  • the receiving unit 3112 of the second communication unit 3110 determines whether the command signal has been transmitted from the first communication unit 3100 (step 3202).
  • the receiving unit 3111 of the second communication means 311 determines that the command signal has been received in step 3202, it transmits from the first communication means 3100.
  • the receiving unit 3111 of the second communication unit 3110 determines whether or not the received command signal includes a command to change the imaging direction of the imaging unit 3103 (step 3). 203).
  • the imaging direction changing unit 2603 changes the imaging direction of the imaging unit 3030 based on the command (step 3203). 0 4), and the operating means 260 4 starts the photographing of the imaging means 30 30 (step 3 205).
  • the transmitting section 3111 of the second communication means 31110 transmits the video information captured in step 3205 to the first communication means 3110 (step 3206),
  • the receiving section 3 1 1 2 of the second communication means 311 determines whether or not a command to end the photographing has been transmitted from the first communication means 3 1 0 0 (step 3 2 0 7). If it is determined in 07 that an instruction to end imaging has been given, the imaging by the imaging means 3030 is ended (step 3208), the process returns to step 3201, and the processing is repeated.
  • step 3201 If it is determined in step 3201 that the induction is in the ON state, the flow advances to step 1701 shown in FIG. 27 to perform the subsequent operations. If it is determined in step 3202 that the command signal from the first communication means 3100 has not been transmitted, the process returns to step 3201 again to repeat the operation.
  • the photographing direction of the image pickup means 3300 may be the direction currently set. Then, the photographing of the photographing means 310 is started without changing the photographing direction (step 3209).
  • FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are explanatory views as viewed from the right rear of the automobile.
  • FIG. 33 shows a display unit 300 provided in the display unit 300, which is stored in the vehicle.
  • the photographing direction of the camera 3030 which is a means, is shown to be facing the rear of the car (in FIG. 33, this side), and
  • FIG. 34 shows the case where the locking section 3102 is operated to operate the housing.
  • the figure shows a state in which the display unit 310 is formed so as to protrude downward from the storage unit 310 1 formed in the body 310.
  • the shooting direction of the camera 3030 is the same as in FIG.
  • the second communication means for communicating with the mobile phone 350 and the personal computer 360 is provided in the car, and the first communication means is provided even when the car is unmanned.
  • Means 3100 The mobile phone 3500 can be used to view images of the vehicle interior and surroundings using a personal computer 3600, so that unmanned vehicles can be easily monitored and used. This has the effect of improving the convenience of the person.
  • Embodiment 7
  • FIG. 37 is an explanatory view showing a state in which a child seat is mounted on an intermediate seat provided in an automobile, and an infant is seated on the seat
  • FIG. 38 is a camera 300 as an image pickup means.
  • Explanatory drawing showing the image of a child sitting in a child seat taken on the display provided in the car.
  • Fig. 39 shows the display of the display described in Fig. 38. It is an enlarged view.
  • the state inside the car room and the state around the car are transmitted to the external first communication means 3100.
  • the instrument pack in the car The display may be performed on a display device 106 provided in the panel 102.
  • the video taken by the camera 300 is displayed on the display device 106 provided on the instrument panel 102, and the camera 30 is located near the driver's seat.
  • An operation unit (not shown) for taking a picture of the camera 30 is provided.
  • an operation is performed.
  • the image is taken by the camera 303 and displayed on the display device 106.
  • the shooting direction of the camera 3030 is backward, but the shooting direction can be changed.
  • the seventh embodiment can display an image in the vehicle cabin on a nearby display device, so that the range of use of the device is widened and the convenience of the device is further improved.
  • FIG. 8 a mobile device installation device according to another embodiment 8 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42.
  • the operation units 24 1 and 24 2 provided on the front part of the center console unit 200 are operated.
  • reference numeral 4001 denotes a seated person in each seat provided in the automobile.
  • the seat occupant detection means 4001 has a pressure sensor, an occupant camera, etc. (not shown) provided substantially at the center of the seat. When a passenger is present, a pressing force is applied to the pressure sensor, so that the presence of a seated person is detected. In addition, the presence or absence of a seated person is detected by taking an image of the seat with an occupant camera and performing image analysis.
  • Reference numeral 4002 denotes occupant presence / absence determination means for determining whether or not each seat has a occupant based on the result detected by the occupant detection means 4001. The occupant presence / absence judging means 4002 judges from the result of the detection by the occupant detecting means 4001 that a seat or the like only holding luggage has no occupant.
  • Reference numeral 4003 is provided with a position sensor (not shown) for judging the posture, body shape, etc. of the occupant of the seat detected by the occupant detection means 4001 as having an occupant.
  • 4 is a display unit 106, 2200 for displaying a list of seats where the occupants are located, based on the results output from the occupant presence / absence determination means 4002 and the occupant state determination means 4003.
  • Display control means for performing display control on the display, based on the control of the display control means 404, as shown in a list on the display units 106 and 220 as shown in FIG.
  • the setting value selection means 4006 selects a predetermined setting value from the movement setting values stored in the storage means 40007 (described later). Then, this set value is output.
  • 40007 is each seat provided in the car interior as shown in Fig. 12))
  • the center The setting value of whether or not the display unit 220 provided on the console unit 200 is projected from the upper surface of the center console unit 200, and the operation provided on the center console unit 200
  • This is storage means for storing a set value of whether or not the unit 230 is projected from the upper surface of the center console unit 200 in association with each other.
  • reference numeral 400 denotes a movement set value selected from the storage means 400 output from the set value selection means 400, a display section set value as a display means protrusion set value, and an operation means protrusion set value.
  • the center console unit 200 is moved according to the set value based on the set value of the operation unit, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are projected from the upper surface of the housing unit 210.
  • Movement control means to be accommodated in the housing part 210, and reference numeral 4009 designates the center console unit 200 as shown in FIG. 1 based on the control signal output by the movement control means 408. Move in the direction A or B as shown, and
  • the moving means 4 is similar to the structure described in the first embodiment.
  • Reference numeral 009 denotes a wheel portion 201, a coupling portion 202 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the wheel portion 201, a driving portion (not shown) built in the wheel portion 201, and a rail portion 110.
  • An engaging portion 111 formed in the groove of the rail portion 110, a driving mechanism of the display portion 220 and a driving mechanism of the operating portion 230 are provided.
  • 4005 is a seated person presence / absence determination means 4002 and a seated person state determination means
  • the air bag control means controls the operation of an air bag device (not shown) provided in the vehicle based on the result output from the control means.
  • the airbag device to be controlled is called an advanced airbag device.
  • step 4200 When the ignition of the car is turned on, the operation of the device is started (step 4200), and the occupant detection means 4001 detects the occupant of each seat in the car (step 4201). After the processing of step 4201, it is determined whether or not the occupant presence / absence determining means has determined the presence or absence of a occupant (step 4202). If judged, the display control means 400 displays a list of occupants on the display sections 106 and 220. (Step 420), and from the list displayed in Step 4203, it is determined whether or not the user has selected which seat to move the center console unit 200 to.
  • step 4204 it is determined (step 4204), and when it is determined that the selection has been made in step 4204, each set value corresponding to this selection is stored in the setting value selection means 4006 from the storage means 40.07. Then, based on the selected set value, the movement control means 408 moves the movement means 409 (step 425). After the processing in step 420, it is determined whether or not the movement has been completed (step 420), and if it is determined in step 420 that the movement has been completed, step 42 0 Return to 1 and repeat the process.
  • step 4202 If it is determined in step 4202 that the presence or absence of a seated person has not been determined, the process returns to step 4201 again to repeat the processing.
  • step 402 If it is determined that the presence or absence of a occupant has been determined in step 402, the process proceeds to step 423, and the determination result of the presence / absence determination means is output to the airbag control means 405. As a result, the operation of the airbag apparatus is in a standby state (step 4207). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the ignition has been turned off (step 408). If it is determined in this step 408 that the ignition has been turned off, the operation control of the airbag device ends (step 408). Step 4 209).
  • step 4204 when the setting value selection means 4006 determines that there is no selection operation in step 4204, the process returns to step 4203 again and repeats the processing. If it is determined in step 420 that the movement of the center console unit 200 has not been completed, the process returns to step 420 and repeats the processing.
  • step 408 If it is determined in step 408 that the ignition has not been turned off, the flow returns to step 408 again to wait for the operation of the airbag device. Keep the state.
  • Embodiment 9 since the occupant information used for the airbag device is configured to be effectively used for the movement setting of the mobile device disposition device, when the user moves the center console unit 200, Since the troublesome operation can be reduced to the minimum operation, the operability of the device and the convenience of the device are further improved.
  • FIG. 43 is a configuration diagram showing a configuration in which a navigation device is provided in a mobile information processing device.
  • FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example displayed on the device of FIG. 43.
  • FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow of the operation of the information processing apparatus for a mobile object shown in FIG.
  • an information source such as a receipt is captured by a camera 108 or a camera 250 as an imaging means, and a display unit 106 and a center provided on an instrument panel 102 are provided. This is displayed on a display unit 220 provided in one console unit 200.
  • Reference numeral 430 denotes a camera 108, which is photographed by a camera 250, and output visible information and storage means to be described later. Means for analyzing by comparing the visible information captured by the cameras 108 and 250 stored in the camera with dictionary information indicating the visible information, and 430.
  • 4301 is a storage means for storing dictionary information as visible information to be compared when analyzing the contents of visible information captured by the cameras 108 and 250.
  • Reference numeral 4303 denotes navigation means for displaying the current position of the vehicle and map information around the current position on the display section 106 and the display section 220. It can set destinations, search for routes to these destinations, and provide route guidance.
  • 4304 is an operation means for performing a predetermined operation on the navigation means 4303, and this operation means 4304 is operated when determining settings such as a destination and a route search. It does.
  • the display control signal of the display control means 4305 is output to the navigation means 430.3, and the navigation means 4303 receives the display control signal and analyzes the result by the analysis means 4301. Is reflected in the destination setting, route search, route guidance setting, etc., output to the display control means 4305 again, and displayed on the display unit 106 and the display unit 220 ⁇ in the first embodiment.
  • the contents of (1) are read by the camera (128) or (250) and character analysis is performed by the analyzing means (430).
  • the address “6, Ichibancho, Tachikawa-shi, Tokyo” is written on the receipt.
  • the user is asked whether 3 is set as the destination.
  • the display examples of the display unit 106 and the display unit 220 are as shown in FIG. 44, and if "YES" is selected, the address described on the receipt is set as the destination.
  • step 4500 When the induction is turned on, the operation of the apparatus is started (step 4500), and it is determined whether or not the text information of the receipt, which is visible information, is read by the cameras 128, 250 (step 2102). If it is determined that the character information has been read, the analyzing means 430 1 analyzes which character information stored in the storage means 4302 corresponds to the read character information (step 2 102). . In this step 2102, the analysis means 430 1 determines whether or not the analyzed content is related information used in the navigation means 4303 (step 4501), and in this step 4501, the navigation means 43 If the information is determined to be related to 03, a setting function for setting the navigation means 4303 is displayed (step 4502). The display example displayed in this step 4502 is shown in FIG. Next, the navigation means 4303 determines whether or not a selection operation has been performed on the content displayed in step 4502 (step 4503). This selection operation indicates that “YE S” or “N 0” is selected in the display as shown in FIG.
  • step 4503 If it is determined in step 4503 that the selection operation has been performed, the navigation means 4303 performs a setting operation (step 4504). If the contents are as shown in FIG. 44, the setting operation as the destination is performed.
  • the display control means 4305 causes the display unit 106 and the display unit 22Q to display a display of the content including the content set in step 4504 (step 4505). After the process of step 4505, the process returns to step 2101, and thereafter, the process is repeated.
  • step 211 If it is determined in step 211 that the visible information has not been read, the process returns to step 211 again and repeats until the reading of the visible information is completed. If it is determined in step 4501 that the navigation means 4303 is not character information related to the setting value of the navigation means 4303, the processing proceeds to step 2 shown in FIG. Proceed to 100 (step 4506). If it is determined in step 4503 that the selection operation has not been performed, the process returns to step 4503 again to repeat the processing.
  • Embodiment 10 the information related to the navigation function is analyzed from the visible information such as receipts, and the selection operation is easily performed. Therefore, the operation for setting the navigation can be extremely simplified, and the user convenience and the device Operability is improved.
  • the store position can be stored in the navigation device installed in the car and can be easily used when driving in the future has been described what it did, calculation or the like of the expenses paid drive during good c ie even in the so performed also counts the amount of receipts shown in the second 2 figure paid breakdown and its these materials
  • the cost may be displayed in a list, and this configuration can be used as a household account book, expanding the range of use of the device, and expanding the gender and age of the target user. The effect is obtained.
  • Embodiment 11 1 1.
  • the senor is automatically activated by a user operation. Evening console unit 200, the force that explained the movement of the two-hundred and two-hundred force When the power source of the car was turned off, that is, when the power switch was turned off, the center one console unit 200, The configuration may be such that 222 is automatically moved to a preset position, that is, a default position. .
  • the preset position is a position where the user can use lightly, and thus the position is changed by moving the center console units 200 and 220.
  • the position can be reset when the car's guidance is turned off and automatically moved to the default position, and the center-to-console unit 200, 220 can be moved each time the user gets on the vehicle. The convenience of the user is improved without being forced.
  • Embodiment 1 2.
  • the center console units 200 and 220 are set to predetermined positions, that is, default positions. It has been described that the system is configured to move back to the position automatically.However, the default position is set as the seating position of the driver who is the most frequent passenger of the vehicle, that is, the driver's seat and the passenger's seat. It may be set at a position sandwiched between them.
  • Embodiment 1 Since the position corresponding to the driver's seat with the highest frequency of use of the vehicle is set in advance as the default position, the convenience of the driver is improved.
  • the information of the display unit 106 provided in the instrument panel 102 and the display unit provided in the center console unit 200, 220 The relationship between the information on the display unit 220 provided in the display unit 220, the display unit 250, and the display unit 300 was not described. A part may be provided. In other words, the content displayed on one display unit may be displayed on the other display unit using the transmission / reception unit of each other, and the same information may be used by all members, for example, when there are many passengers in the car. Since the device can be shared, the range of use of the device can be expanded, and user convenience is improved.
  • the transmitting and receiving unit may use an infrared ray, a Bluetooth technology, or the like.
  • the center console units 200 and 220 are set as the set values of the center console units 200 and 220 and the movement set value of the center console units 200 and 220 and the protrusion of the display unit. It has been described that the three types of set values, the set value and the protrusion set value of the operation unit, are stored. However, each set value may be configured with only one type of set value. The capacity can be reduced as much as possible and the convenience of the device can be obtained.
  • Industrial applicability As described above, the information processing apparatus for a mobile object according to the present invention reads visible information such as a receipt or a sightseeing guidebook in a mobile object such as a car by an imaging means, analyzes the contents, and performs predetermined information processing. This is suitable for use as an information processing device for a moving object.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
  • Remote Sensing (AREA)
  • Automation & Control Theory (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Computer Vision & Pattern Recognition (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Fittings On The Vehicle Exterior For Carrying Loads, And Devices For Holding Or Mounting Articles (AREA)

Abstract

An information processor for a moving body, in which imaging means (108, 250) mounted on an automobile (100) or a moving body conducts analysis such as character recognition, calculates costs according to the results of the analysis, and outputs the results of the analysis to a navigator to register position information and to determine the destination automatically. Management or setting of a navigator can be readily conducted in the automobile (100), and the convenience of the processor is improved.

Description

明細 移動体用情報処理装置 技術分野  Description Information processing equipment for mobile objects
この発明は自動車等の移動体に搭載された撮像手段により文字認識 等の解析を行い、 この解析結果に基づき、 費用の集計を行なったり、 ナ ピゲ一シヨン装置に出力して位置情報の登録や、 目的地の設定等を自動 的に行う移動体用情報処理装置に関するものである。 背景技術  The present invention analyzes character recognition and the like by imaging means mounted on a moving body such as an automobile, and based on the analysis result, totals costs, outputs the results to a navigation device, and registers position information. The present invention relates to a mobile information processing apparatus for automatically setting a destination and the like. Background art
第 4 6図は、 従来の自動車における車室内の概略構成を示す概略構成 図である。  FIG. 46 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cabin of a conventional automobile.
この第 4 6図に示すように、 従来の自動車において、 1は車室内の前 部に設けられたィンストウルメントパネル、 2はィンストウルメントパ ネル 1の中央部 1 aに設けられたラジオ受信機やカセッ トデッキプレ —ャゃ C Dプレーヤ等のオーディォ、 3はィンストウルメントパネル 1 の中央上部に設けられたダッシュポ一ド、 4はィンストウルメントパネ ル 1の右側に設けられたステアリングホイール、 5は前 であり、 この 前席 5には運転席 5 a、 助手席 5 bとが左右に並べて設けられている。 また、 6は運転席 5 aと助手席 5 bとの間に挟まれた位置に設置され たセンターコンソールボックスである。 .  As shown in FIG. 46, in the conventional vehicle, 1 is an instrument panel provided at the front of the vehicle interior, and 2 is provided at the center 1a of the instrument panel 1. Audio such as a radio receiver or cassette deck player, CD player, etc., 3 is a dashpad provided in the upper center of the instrument panel 1, and 4 is a steering wheel provided on the right side of the instrument panel 1. The front wheel 5 is provided with a driver's seat 5a and a passenger's seat 5b, which are arranged side by side. Reference numeral 6 denotes a center console box installed between the driver's seat 5a and the passenger's seat 5b. .
従来、 オーディオ 2は、 インストウルメントパネル 1の中央部 1 aに 設置するように構成したものが主流である。  Conventionally, the audio 2 is mainly configured to be installed at the center 1 a of the instrument panel 1.
一方、 近年になってナビゲーシヨン装置が普及し始め、 運転席や助手 席等の前側座席下にナビゲーシヨン装置本体 (図示せず) を設置して、 ナビゲーション装置から出力される地図情報を表示する表示部をィン ストウルメントパネル 1の中央部近傍に設置したり、 オーディォの設置 スペースを小さ <して、 表示部をィンス卜ウルメントパネル 1の中央部 上方に設置、即ち、ダッシュポード 3の中に埋設するようにしたものや、 また、 インストウルメントパネル 1の運転席側に設置されていた制動系 の状態を示す計器類をィンストウルメントパネル 1の中央部に設置す るように構成したものが出始めており、 このような構成が今後の主流に なりつつある。 On the other hand, in recent years, navigation devices have begun to spread, and a navigation device body (not shown) has been installed under front seats such as a driver's seat and a passenger seat. The display section that displays the map information output from the navigation device is installed near the center of the instrument panel 1, or the audio installation space is reduced. <The display section is placed in the center of the instrument panel 1. The instrument installed above the unit, that is, buried in the dashboard 3, and the instruments that indicate the state of the braking system installed on the driver's seat side of the instrument panel 1 are installed in the instrument. Structures that are designed to be installed in the center of Panel 1 have begun to appear, and such a structure is becoming the mainstream in the future.
また、 表示部の設置においては、 インストウルメントパネル 1の中央 部上方に設置、 即ち、 ダッシュボード 3の中に埋設するように構成した ものや、 運転席 5 aや助手席 5 bの上部であるヘッドレスト (頭部支承 部) に支持部を介して表示部を設けるように構成したものがある。  In addition, when installing the display unit, it is installed above the center of the instrument panel 1, that is, embedded in the dashboard 3, or above the driver's seat 5a or the passenger's seat 5b. Some headrests (head support parts) are provided with a display unit via a support unit.
さらに、 天井部の前席と後席との中間付近に固定されたモニタ部を設 け、 後席の搭乗者がモニタ部を利用してテレビやビデオ、 D V D等の映 像を表示可能に構成したものもある。  In addition, a monitor is fixed around the ceiling between the front and rear seats so that passengers in the rear can use the monitor to display TV, video, DVD, and other images. Some have done it.
このような背景のもと、 特開平 1 0— 2 9 7 3 9 1号公報において、 従来、 ィンス卜ウルメントパネル 1の中央部に設置されていたオーディ ォ装置やエアコン等のスィツチ類を運転席と助手席との間に設置され たセンターコンソール 6に設けたものが記載されており、 第 4 7図は、 この要部を示す要部構成図である。  Against this background, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 10-2977391 discloses a method of operating switches, such as an audio device and an air conditioner, which were conventionally installed at the center of the instrument panel 1. What is provided on the center console 6 installed between the seat and the passenger seat is described. FIG. 47 is a main part configuration diagram showing this main part.
第 4 7図において、 1は車室内の前部に設けられたィンストウルメン トパネル、 3はィンストウルメントパネル 1の中央上部に設けられたダ ッシユボード、 4はィンストウルメントパネル 1の右側に設けられたス テアリングホイール、 5は前席であり、 この前席 5には運転席 5 a、 助 手席 5 bとが左右に並べて設けられている。  In Fig. 47, 1 is an instrument panel provided at the front of the vehicle interior, 3 is a dash board provided at the upper center of the instrument panel 1, and 4 is a right side of the instrument panel 1. The steering wheel 5 is a front seat, and the front seat 5 is provided with a driver's seat 5a and a passenger seat 5b which are arranged side by side.
6は運転席 5 aと助手席 5 bとの間に挟まれた位置に設置されたセ ンターコンソールボックス、 7はィンストウルメントパネル 1の中央下 部に設けられたギアチェンジレバー、 8はィンストウルメン卜パネル 1 の中央上部に設けられたディスプレイである。 Reference numeral 6 denotes a cell installed between the driver's seat 5a and the passenger's seat 5b. The reference numeral 7 denotes a gear change lever provided at the lower center of the instrument panel 1, and 8 denotes a display provided at the upper center of the instrument panel 1.
また、 第 4 8図に示すように、 センタ一コンソールボックス 6には蓋 6 aを設け、 この盖 6 aにより開閉される収納部がセンタ一コンソール ボックス 6内部に形成されている。  Also, as shown in FIG. 48, the center console box 6 is provided with a lid 6a, and a storage section opened and closed by the lid 6a is formed inside the center console box 6.
さらに、 センターコンソールボックス 6の前方の一部に、 凹部状に形 成されたスィツチ配設部 9が設けられており、 このスィツチ配設部 9に リモコンュニッ ト 1 0が着脱可能に嵌着されるように構成されている。 このように構成したことにより、 自動車の運転席や助手席に座ってい る搭乗者が通常の着座姿勢のまま簡単にスィツチ操作することができ るものである。  Further, a switch mounting portion 9 formed in a concave shape is provided in a part of the front of the center console box 6, and a remote control unit 10 is detachably fitted to the switch mounting portion 9. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, a passenger sitting in a driver's seat or a passenger seat of a car can easily perform a switch operation in a normal sitting posture.
また、 実願平 4一 8 6 6 3 8号 (実開平 6— 4 9 2 2 0号公報) にお いて、 バスの車内に装備されるテレビ受信機、 温冷蔵庫等の乗客サービ ス用備品及び乗客用飲食物の物品を車内前後に移動するための搬送ケ ースを示しており、 第 4 9図はこの装置の概略構成を示した概略構成図、 第 5 0図はテレビ受信機が搬送ケース内に収納された状態の断面図で ある。  In addition, in Japanese Utility Model Application No. Hei 6-168663 (Japanese Utility Model Application Laid-Open No. 6-49220), equipment for passenger services such as a television receiver and a hot refrigerator installed in a bus car. And a transportation case for moving food and drink items for passengers back and forth in the vehicle. FIG. 49 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of this device, and FIG. 50 is a television receiver. It is sectional drawing of the state accommodated in the carrying case.
第 4 9図、 第 5 0図において、 2 1は収納ケース 2 5 (後述する) の —面に配設されたテレビ受信機の表示部、 2 2は移動体としてのバス、 2 3はバス 2 2に設置されたシート、 2 4はバス 2 2の天井の略中央部 に設けられたレール、 2 5はレール 2 4に移動可能に吊り下げられた搬 送ケース、 2 6はレール 2 4に搬送ケース 2 5が摺動支持されるローラ 部である。  In FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, reference numeral 21 denotes a display unit of a television receiver disposed on a surface of a storage case 25 (described later), 22 denotes a bus as a moving body, and 23 denotes a bus. 22 is a seat, 2 is a rail provided at the approximate center of the ceiling of the bus 22, 25 is a transport case movably suspended on the rail 24, and 26 is a rail 24 This is a roller section on which the transfer case 25 is slidably supported.
このように構成したことにより、 テレビ受信機等の乗客サービス用備 品又は乗客飲食物等の物品を収納した搬送ケースが車内で簡単に移動 でき、 備品や飲食物等が不要な際は、 乗客の視界障害を解消するととも に飲食物等の物品を各乗客に簡単に配ることができるものである。 With this configuration, the transport case containing passenger service equipment such as a television receiver or articles such as passenger food and drink can easily move in the vehicle. When equipment and food and drinks are not required, it is possible to eliminate obstacles to passengers' visibility and to easily distribute food and drinks to each passenger.
さらにまた、 特開平 1 1 一 7 8 6 9 3号公報において、 自動車のルー ムミラー本体にモニタを内設した車両用監視装置が示されており、 第 5 1図はこの装置の要部構成を示した分解斜視図であり、 第 5 2図は要 部構成の断面を示した要部断面図、 第 5 3図は要部への表示例を示した 説明図である。  Further, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-76893 discloses a vehicle monitoring device in which a monitor is provided inside a vehicle's room mirror main body, and FIG. 51 shows a main configuration of this device. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view shown in FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a main part configuration, and FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of display on the main part.
これら第 5 1図、 第 5 2図、 第 5 3図において、 ルームミラー本体 3 0は、 車体の運転席の前方の車室内天井面に設置されており、 このル一 ムミラー本体 3 0は、 車体の後方を写すバックミラ一の機能と、 車体の 後方を撮影するリァ撮像力メラのリァモニタの機能を有しており、 構造 としては、 筐体 3 1と、 モニタ 3 2と、 ハーフミラー 3 3と、 枠体 3 4 と、 アーム 3 5とで構成されており、 モニタ 3 2の電源が投入され、 ギ ァチェンジでリバースにした際、 第 5 3図に示すような表示がモニタ 3 2になされる。 この第 5 3図では、 左右 2画面に分割され、 右側には力 メラで撮影された後方映像を表示し、 左側には注意事項が表示されるよ うになつている。  In FIGS. 51, 52 and 53, the rearview mirror body 30 is installed on the ceiling surface of the cabin in front of the driver's seat of the vehicle body. It has the function of a rear-view mirror that captures the rear of the vehicle body, and the function of a rear monitor for the rear imaging device that captures the rear of the vehicle body. The structure includes a housing 31, a monitor 32, and a half mirror 33. And a frame 34 and an arm 35.When the monitor 32 is powered on and reverses by gear change, the display shown in Fig. 53 is displayed on the monitor 32. You. In Fig. 53, the screen is divided into two screens on the left and right, the rear image taken with the camera is displayed on the right, and notes are displayed on the left.
このように構成したことにより、 リア撮像カメラからの映像を確認す ることで、 車体の後方を視認することができるものである。  With this configuration, it is possible to visually check the rear of the vehicle body by checking the image from the rear imaging camera.
さらに、 従来の自動車においては、 バックミラ一 (ルームミラー) が 運転席近傍の天井部に取り付けられ、 追い越し確認や車線変更等を行う など自動車の後方を確認する際、 バックミラーにより後方の状況を写し 出されたものを見て運転者は後方を確認できるようになっているが、 バ ックミラ一より後方の車室内において後方視界を遮るものがある場合、 パックミラ一により後方確認がし難くなることがある。 例えば、 配送専. 用車のように運転席後方に多量の荷物を搭載した状態にあっては、 バッ クミラーと車両後部の窓 (リアウィンドウ) の間が荷物によって後方視 界が遮られることが多い。 Furthermore, in conventional vehicles, a rearview mirror (room mirror) is mounted on the ceiling near the driver's seat, and when the driver checks the rear of the vehicle, such as when checking for passing or changing lanes, the rearview mirror reflects the situation behind the vehicle. The driver is able to see behind what is being issued, but if there is something obstructing the rear view in the passenger compartment behind the back-up mirror, it may be difficult for the back-up view to be confirmed by the back-up mirror. is there. For example, if you have a lot of luggage behind the driver's seat like a delivery car, Luggage often blocks the rear view between the mirror and the rear window of the vehicle.
このような背景のもと、 上記問題を解決するために、 特開平 4— 7 1 9 3 9号公報に記載の装置が提案されており、 第 5 4図は、 この公報に 示された要部を示す要部説明図である。  Against this background, in order to solve the above problems, an apparatus described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 4-71939 has been proposed, and FIG. It is a principal part explanatory view showing a part.
第 5 4図において、 この装置は、 車両の後部に車両後方の視界を十分 確保できる位置に撮像装置 (図示せず) を設けるとともに、 車両の運転 席の天井部に撮像装置で撮像された映像をフロントガラスに向って映 写する表示装置 4 1と、 この表示装置 4 1により映写された映像を運転 者の視界に入るよう反射させる反射鏡 4 2とを配設して構成したもの であり、 このように構成することにより車室内の荷物等により後方視界 が遮られても常時、 後方の映像を運転者に見せることができるように構 成されている。  In Fig. 54, this device is equipped with an image pickup device (not shown) at the rear of the vehicle at a position where the field of view behind the vehicle can be sufficiently secured, and an image taken by the image pickup device on the ceiling of the driver's seat of the vehicle. And a reflecting mirror 42 that reflects the image projected by the display device 41 into the driver's field of view. With this configuration, even if the rear view is obstructed by luggage or the like in the vehicle cabin, the driver can always see the rear image.
一方、 車室内で後席の搭乗者が利用できるディスプレイを備えた車両 用後方確認装置が特開平 1 1 一 1 2 9 8 1 5号公報に提案されており、 この公報に示された要部の使用状態を示す要部説明図を第 5 5図に示 す。 この第 5 5図において、 車両の後退ギヤが操作されると O Nするリ バーススィツチ 5 1と、 車両の後方死角を撮影する C C Dカメラ 5 2と、 テレビ放送受信用のアンテナ 5 3と、 テレビチューナ 5 4と、 後席乗員 用のテレビ操作スィッチ 5 5と、 前後席の中間部の天井近くの位置に配 置された液晶ディスプレイ 5 6と、 この液晶ディスプレイを車両の天井 部から支持し、 かつ液晶ディスプレイの画面の向きを運転席側、 後席乗 員側に回転駆動する電気モータで成るディスプレイ駆動部 5 7と、 これ らの各機器の動作を制御する制御部 5 8とから構成されている。 ' このように構成したことにより、 車室内から窓ガラス越しに車両後方、 側方を確認できる車両において、 運転手が車両を後退させる時に車両後 方を向くことで、 車両後方の死角部分については後方を向いたまま、 視 線をディスプレイの方に移動させ、 その表示内容を見て確認することが できるようになり、 後退運転時の後方確認のための運転手の負担を軽減 させることができるものである。 On the other hand, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. H11-11298015 has proposed a rear-view device for vehicles equipped with a display that can be used by passengers in the rear seats in the passenger compartment. Fig. 55 is an explanatory diagram of the main parts showing the use state of the device. In Fig. 55, a reverse switch 51 that is turned on when the reverse gear of the vehicle is operated, a CCD camera 52 that captures the rear blind spot of the vehicle, an antenna 53 for receiving TV broadcasts, and a TV tuner 54, a TV operation switch for rear passengers 55, a liquid crystal display 56 located near the ceiling in the middle of the front and rear seats, and supporting the liquid crystal display from the ceiling of the vehicle, and It is composed of a display drive unit 57 composed of an electric motor that rotates the LCD screen to the driver's seat side and the rear passenger side, and a control unit 58 that controls the operation of these devices. I have. '' With this configuration, in a vehicle that allows the driver to check the rear and side of the vehicle from the passenger compartment through the window glass, By turning your eyes, you can move your line of sight to the display while looking at the blind spot behind the vehicle, and check the displayed contents. This can reduce the driver's burden for driving.
また、 従来、 自動車で外出する際に買物をすることもよくあり、 買物 をした際に店員から手渡されるレシ一トを自宅まで持ち帰って自宅で 家計簿を付けたり、 気に入つたお店があった際などは、 メモしておくな どのことで対応していた。  In addition, in the past, people often shop when going out by car, and when they go shopping, they take the receipt handed by the clerk back to their homes and attach a household account book at home, or there are shops that they like. In such cases, they responded by taking notes.
さらに、 ナビゲーション装置にて観光ガイドブック等を見ながら気に 入った場所を目的地に設定する際は、 使用者が幾つもの階層から構成さ れているメニュ一画面を逐一操作にて設定していた。  In addition, when setting a favorite place as a destination while viewing a sightseeing guidebook or the like on the navigation device, the user sets a menu screen consisting of several layers by operating the screen one by one. Was.
従来の自動車用音響装置や映像再生装置は、 以上のように自動車内に 取り付けられ固定されている、 即ち、 移動不可能なようにインストウル メン卜パネルの中央部付近に設置されていることが多く、 こうように構 成されたものにおいては、 インストウルメントパネルの中央部では設置 スペースが限られているため、 このスペースに設置する装置を使用者が 厳選する必要があり、 特に、 自動車内で多種多様な音響装置や映像再生 装置等を利用したいユーザにとって選択自由度が低いなど利便性が悪 いという問題があった。  Conventional audio and video playback devices for automobiles are mounted and fixed inside the automobile as described above, that is, they are installed near the center of the instrument panel so that they cannot be moved. In many cases, the installation space is limited in the center of the instrument panel in such a configuration, so the user must carefully select the equipment to be installed in this space. Therefore, there is a problem that the user who wants to use various kinds of audio devices and video reproducing devices is inconvenient, such as a low degree of freedom in selection.
また、 インストウルメントパネルの中央部に音響装置を設置している ために、 特に、 カセットテープ、 D A T、 C D、 M D、 D V D等の記録 媒体の交換や、 各装置の設定操作や ¾数の装置を同時に設定操作するこ となどは、 前席である運転席と助手席の着座者しか行なうことができず、 前席の着座者以外、 即ち、 後席の着座者は着座している状態では上記し たようなことが行なえず、 後席の着座者の利便性が極めて悪いという問 題があった。 また、 インストウルメントパネルの中央部に映像再生装置等からの可 視情報を表示する表示手段を設置するものにおいて、 前席の着座者には 視認性が高いが、 後席の着座者にとって表示手段から離れるために、 視 認性が低下するという問題があつた。 In addition, since the sound system is installed in the center of the instrument panel, it is especially necessary to change recording media such as cassette tapes, DATs, CDs, MDs, DVDs, etc. Can only be set and operated at the same time, only the driver and passenger seats in the front seats can be set up.Other than the front seated occupants, that is, if the rear seated occupants are seated, There was a problem that the above-mentioned things could not be performed and the convenience of the rear seated occupants was extremely poor. In addition, a display means for displaying visual information from a video playback device or the like is installed in the center of the instrument panel. The visibility is high for occupants in the front seat, but is displayed for occupants in the rear seat. There was a problem that visibility was reduced due to leaving the means.
また、 音響装置や映像再生装置の操作をする際、 通常、 これらの操作 手段は装置と一体に構成されているため、 ィンストウルメントパネルの 中央部に手を伸ばして操作する必要があり、 後席の着座者は操作できな い上、 前席の着座者でさえも、 シートにもたれた姿勢から前かがみの姿 勢に変えて操作しなければならず、 手軽に操作を行なえないという問題 があった。  In addition, when operating an audio device or a video playback device, since these operation means are usually integrated with the device, it is necessary to reach the center of the instrument panel to operate. The rear seats cannot be operated, and even the front seats must be operated by changing from leaning on the seat to leaning forward, making it difficult to operate easily. there were.
また、 操作手段をリモートコントローラ (以下、 リモコンと称す) と して装置から離脱するものもあるが、 このような構成のものは、 リモコ ンによる操作の後、 リモコンを収納箇所から離脱させたままにしておく ことが多々あり、 リモコンは通常、 小型なものであるため、 操作手段の 行方が分からなくなり、 操作する際、 リモコンを探さなければならない ことに陥ったりする問題もあった。  In some cases, the operating means is detached from the device as a remote controller (hereinafter, referred to as a remote controller). In such a configuration, the remote controller is detached from the storage location after the remote control operation. In many cases, the remote control is usually small, so it is difficult to find out where the operating means is, and there is a problem that the user must search for the remote control when operating.
また、 音響機器や映像再生機器等は、 インストウルメントパネルの中 央部に設置され、 インストウルメントパネル内で配線等の接続が行なわ れるように固定されているため、 狭いスペースしかないィンストウルメ ントパネルにおいて、 設置したい機器数が限定され、 設置する際は、 よ り機器を厳選する必要があり、 装置の発展性を低下させ、 使用者の利便 性が低下するという問題があつた。  In addition, audio equipment and video playback equipment are installed in the center of the instrument panel and fixed so that wiring and other connections can be made within the instrument panel. However, the number of devices to be installed was limited, and it was necessary to select the devices more carefully when installing the devices, which reduced the development of the devices and reduced the convenience for users.
さらに、 インストウルメントパネルの中央部に表示手段とともに、 こ の表示手段の表示内容を操作するための夕ツチパネル等の操作手段が 設けられているため、 この操作手段を操作する際において、 操作手段へ の操作を行なう際は、 シー卜にもたれた姿勢から前かがみの姿勢に変え て操作するか、 もしくは、 手を伸ばして操作しなければならず、 手軽に 操作を行なえないという問題があった。 Furthermore, since an operation means such as a touch panel for operating the display contents of the display means is provided in the center of the instrument panel together with the display means, the operation means is operated when the operation means is operated. When performing the operation, change the posture from leaning on the seat to the leaning posture. Operation must be performed by hand, or the user must reach for the operation, which makes it difficult to perform the operation easily.
また、 移動体の中でもバスなどのように座席間が搭乗者の通路になつ ている場合、 フロアは搭乗者の通行を妨げるため、 何も設置できないと いう問題があった。  In addition, there is also a problem that if the space between the seats is a passenger's passage such as a bus even in a moving body, no floor can be installed because the floor blocks the passengers' passage.
一方、 バスの天井部に設けたレール部に吊り下げて配設したテレビ受 信機がパスの前後方向に移動可能に構成されているものもあるが、 車内 に設置されている座席位置とテレビ受信機の移動停止位置との関係を 持たせているものではないため、 使用者が着座している座席に対応した 位置になるようテレビ受信機の位置を使用者が使用する度にテレビ受 信機の移動を調整しながら停止しなければならず、 使用者の利便性が悪 いという問題があった。  On the other hand, some TV receivers are mounted on rails provided on the ceiling of the bus so that they can move in the front-rear direction of the pass. It does not have a relationship with the movement stop position of the receiver, so each time the user uses the position of the TV receiver so that the position corresponds to the seat where the user is sitting, the TV reception There was a problem that the user had to stop while adjusting the movement of the aircraft, which was inconvenient for the user.
また、 後席の着座者がテレビ受信機を使用しない場合でも、 常に単独 で配置されているために、 運転者などの搭乗者の邪魔になるという問題 があった。  In addition, even if the rear seat occupant does not use the television receiver, the rear seat is always located alone, which has a problem that it obstructs the driver and other passengers.
さらに、 ルームミラ一より後方の天井部に突出物がある場合、 この突 出物によりルームミラーの後方視界が遮られ、 運転者が後方確認をしに くくなるという問題があり、 また、 このような状況は、 後退時だけでな く、 通常の走行開始時や走行時の車線変更や右左折時など、 即ち、 後方 確認が必要な場合に発生するという問題があった。  Furthermore, if there is a protrusion on the ceiling behind the room mirror, the protrusion blocks the rear view of the room mirror, making it difficult for the driver to check the rear. The situation was not only when the vehicle was backing up, but also at the start of normal driving, when changing lanes during driving, when making a right or left turn, etc., that is, there was a problem that it occurred when it was necessary to check the rear.
しかしながら、 従来は車両の運転席の天井部に撮像装置で撮影された 映像をフロントガラスに向って映写する表示装置と、 この表示装置によ り映写された映像を運転者の視界に入るよう反射させる反射鏡とで構 成しているため、 後方の映像を反射鏡で見る際は、 常時、 撮像装置で撮 影された後方映像を見ることになり、 車内の後部座席等に荷物がない際、 即ち、 後方視界が良好な場合でも、 撮像装置及び表示装置が動作してい るため、 消費電力が発生し、 車載バッテリがあがりやすいという問題が あった。 Conventionally, however, a display device that projects an image captured by an imaging device on the ceiling of a driver's seat of a vehicle toward a windshield, and reflects the image projected by the display device so as to enter a driver's field of view. When viewing the rear image with the reflector, the user always sees the rear image captured by the imaging device, and when there is no luggage in the back seat etc. in the car That is, even when the rear view is good, the imaging device and the display device are operating. As a result, there is a problem that power consumption is generated and the onboard battery is likely to rise.
また、 従来は運転手が車両を後退させる時に車両後方を向いたまま、 視線を前後席の中間部の天井近くに設けたディスプレイの方に移動さ せ、 その表示内容を見て確認することができるよう構成しているため、 ディスプレイの画面の向きを運転席側、 後席乗員側に回転駆動させるデ イスクプレイ駆動部が必要になり、 部品点数が多くなるという問題があ つた。  Conventionally, when the driver moves the vehicle backward, the driver's gaze is moved to the display located near the ceiling in the middle of the front and rear seats while looking at the rear of the vehicle, and the displayed contents can be checked. Because of this configuration, a display drive unit that rotates the screen of the display toward the driver's seat and the rear occupant was required, and the number of parts increased.
また、 車両を後退させる場合は、 後席の搭乗者が前後席の中間部の天 井近くに設けたディスプレイの内容を見て楽しんでいても、 ディスプレ ィの画面を運転席側に回転させるため、 この間、 後席の搭乗者はデイス プレイを利用できなくなり、 後席の搭乗者の利便性が悪くなるという問 題があった。  In addition, when the vehicle is moved backward, even if the passenger in the rear seat enjoys watching the contents of the display provided near the ceiling in the middle of the front and rear seats, the display screen is rotated to the driver's seat side. During this time, the rear passengers could not use the display and the rear passengers became inconvenienced.
また、 自動車で外出した際に買物をした時に受け取るレシートなどの 情報を整理し、 処理することは作業が煩雑で面倒になることが多いとい う問題があった。  Another problem was that organizing and processing information such as receipts received when shopping when going out of a car was complicated and often cumbersome.
さらに、 ナビゲーション装置において気に入った店の住所をレシ一ト や観光ガイドブック等から使用者が読み取り、 使用者の操作によって住 所設定等を行なう必要があり、 操作が煩雑で面倒になることが多いとい う問題があった。  Furthermore, it is necessary for the user to read the address of the favorite shop on the navigation device from a receipt or a sightseeing guidebook, etc., and to set the address, etc. by the user's operation, which is often complicated and troublesome. There was a problem.
この発明は、 かかる問題を解決するためになされたもので、 移動体内 に設けられ、 可視情報を撮影する撮像手段と、 複数の可視情報を記憶し た記憶手段と、 撮像手段が撮影した可視情報と記憶手段に記憶された可 視情報とを比較し解析する解析手段と、 移動体内に設けられた表示手段 と、 この表示手段に対し解析手段の解析結果を表示させる表示制御手段 とを備えたので、 移動体内で可視情報の内容の記憶や、 整理を簡単に行 なえるため、 装置の使用範囲が向上し、 装置の利便性が向上する移動体 用情報処理装置を得ることを目的とする。 The present invention has been made to solve such a problem, and is provided within a moving body, an imaging unit that captures visible information, a storage unit that stores a plurality of pieces of visible information, and a visible information captured by the imaging unit. Analysis means for comparing and analyzing the visual information stored in the storage means with the display means, display means provided in the movable body, and display control means for displaying the analysis result of the analysis means on the display means. Therefore, the contents of visible information can be easily stored and organized in the moving body Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a mobile information processing device in which the range of use of the device is improved and the convenience of the device is improved.
また、 この発明は、 移動体内の前部中央部に表示手段を設けるととも に、 撮像手段は表示手段の近傍に設け、 撮像手段で撮影され解析手段で 解析された結果を表示手段に表示可能に構成したので、 移動体の前席の 搭乗者が可視情報の記憶や整理を行なうことができるため、 移動体内の 座席において着座する割合が高い前席の着座者への装置の操作性や利 便性が向上する移動体用情報処理装置を得ることを目的とする。  Further, according to the present invention, the display means is provided in the center of the front part in the moving body, the imaging means is provided near the display means, and the result photographed by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display means The occupant in the front seat of the mobile body can store and organize the visible information, and the operability and convenience of the device for the front seat occupant who has a high percentage of seats in the mobile body can be stored and organized. It is an object of the present invention to obtain a mobile information processing device with improved convenience.
また、 この発明は、 移動体内の運転席と助手席との間に挟まれる位置 に設けられ、 表示部を有する配設手段と、 この配設手段を移動体の前後 方向に沿って移動可能に案内する案内手段とを設けるとともに、 撮像手 段は配設手段の一部に設け、 撮像手段で撮影され解析手段で解析された 結果を表示部に表示可能に構成したので、 移動体内のどの座席の着座者 でも無理な姿勢をすることなく、 装置を使用することができ、 装置の操 作性が向上し、 使用者の利便性が向上する移動体用情報処理装置を得る ことを目的とする。  Also, the present invention provides an arranging means provided at a position sandwiched between a driver's seat and a passenger's seat in a moving body, the arranging means having a display portion, and the arranging means can be moved in the front-back direction of the moving body In addition to providing guidance means for guiding, the imaging means is provided in a part of the arranging means, and the results obtained by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display unit. It is an object of the present invention to provide a mobile information processing device in which even a seated person can use the device without taking an unreasonable posture, thereby improving the operability of the device and improving the convenience for the user. .
また、 この発明は、 解析手段の解析結果が費用に関する情報の場合、 表示制御手段は費用管理が可能な表示を行うようにするので、 通常、 自 宅で行なっていたマネーマネジメントが移動体内で行なえ、 即ち、 外出 した時など移動体,内でその都度、 マネ一マネジメントが行なえるので、 装置の,使用範囲が向上し、 装置の利便性がさらに向上する移動体用情報 処理装置を得ることを目的とする。  Also, according to the present invention, when the analysis result of the analysis means is information relating to cost, the display control means performs a display capable of managing the cost, so that the money management normally performed at home can be performed within the moving body. That is, since the management can be performed each time in a mobile body such as when going out, it is possible to obtain an information processing device for a mobile body in which the use range of the device is improved and the convenience of the device is further improved. Aim.
また、 この発明は、 移動体内に設けられ、 可視情報を撮影する撮像手 段と、 複数の可視情報を記憶した記憶手段と、 撮像手段が撮影した可視 情報と記憶手段に記憶された可視情報とを比較し解析する解析手段と、 移動体の現在位置とこの現在位置周辺の地図情報とを表示させるナビ ゲーション手段とを備え、 解析手段の解析結果をナビゲーシヨン手段の 設定情報に用いるので、 複雑な設定操作の煩わしさを解消でき、 使用者 の利便性が向上するとともに、 装置の利便性が向上する移動体用情報処 理装.置を得ることを目的とする。 Further, the present invention provides an imaging means provided in a moving body, for capturing visible information, a storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of visible information, and the visible information captured by the imaging means and the visible information stored in the storage means. Analysis means for comparing and analyzing the information, and a navigation system for displaying the current position of the moving object and map information around the current position Since it has a navigation unit and the analysis result of the analysis unit is used for the setting information of the navigation unit, the complicated setting operation can be eliminated and the convenience of the user is improved and the convenience of the device is improved. The purpose is to obtain information processing equipment for mobile objects.
また、 この発明は、 解析手段が解析した可視情報の内容に基づき、 ナ ピゲ一ション手段の設定情報に利用可能な機能を表示する表示手段と、 この表示手段に表示された機能から所定の機能を選択する選択手段と を設けたので、 使用者が全機能から選択する手間が省け、 不要な操作を 省略することにより使用者の利便性が向上するとともに、 装置の利便性 が向上する移動体用情報処理装置を得ることを目的とする。  Also, the present invention provides a display means for displaying a function available for the setting information of the navigation means based on the contents of the visible information analyzed by the analysis means, and a predetermined function based on the function displayed on the display means. Since the selection means and the selection means are provided, it is possible to eliminate the trouble of the user selecting from all functions, and to improve the convenience of the user by omitting unnecessary operations, and to improve the convenience of the apparatus. To obtain an information processing device for use.
また、 この発明は、 解析手段の解析結果が位置に関する情報の場合、 ナビゲーシヨン手段の設定情報は、 位置情報を目的地の位置情報とする ので、 目的地の設定が簡単に行なえ、 使用者の利便性がさらに向上する 移動体用情報処理装置を得ることを目的とする。  Further, according to the present invention, when the analysis result of the analysis means is information on a position, the setting information of the navigation means uses the position information as the position information of the destination, so that the destination can be easily set, and It is an object of the present invention to obtain a mobile information processing device with further improved convenience.
また、 この発明は、 移動体内の前部中央部に表示手段を設けるととも に、 撮像手段は表示手段の近傍に設け、 撮像手段で撮影され解析手段で 解析された結果を表示手段に表示可能に構成し、 撮像手段と表示手段と を近くに配設したので、 撮像手段で撮影しながら表示部の表示内容を確 認しゃすく、 使用者の利便性が向上する移動体用情報処理装置を得るこ とを目的とする。  Further, according to the present invention, the display means is provided in the center of the front part in the moving body, the imaging means is provided near the display means, and the result photographed by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display means Since the imaging means and the display means are disposed close to each other, the information displayed on the display unit can be confirmed while photographing with the imaging means, and the information processing apparatus for a mobile object can be improved in convenience for the user. The purpose is to gain.
さらに、 この発明は、 移動体内の運転席と助手席との間に挟まれる位 置に設けられ、 表示部を有する配設手段と、 この配設手段を移動体の前 後方向に沿って移動可能に案内する案内手段とを設けるとともに、 撮像 手段は配設手段の一部に設け、 撮像手段で撮影され解析手段で解析され た結果を表示部に表示可能に構成したので、 使用者の着座位置に関わら ず、 撮像手段で撮影しながら表示部の表示内容を確認しやすく、 使用者 の利便性がさらに向上する移動体用情報処理装置を得ることを目的と する。 発明の開示 Further, the present invention provides an arranging means having a display portion, which is provided at a position sandwiched between a driver's seat and a passenger's seat in a moving body; In addition to providing guidance means for providing guidance as much as possible, the imaging means is provided as part of the arranging means, and the results taken by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display unit. Regardless of the position, it is easy to check the contents displayed on the display while shooting with the imaging means, It is an object of the present invention to obtain a mobile information processing device that further improves the convenience of the mobile device. Disclosure of the invention
この発明に係る移動体用情報処理装置は、 移動体内に設けられ、 可視 情報を撮影する撮像手段と、 複数の可視情報を記憶した記憶手段と、 撮 像手段が撮影した可視情報と記憶手段に記憶された可視情報とを比較 し解析する解析手段と、 移動体内に設けられた表示手段と、 この表示手 段に対し解析手段の解析結果を表示させる表示制御手段とを備えたの で、 移動体内で可視情報の内容の記憶や、 整理を簡単に行なえるため、 装置の使用範囲が向上し、 装置の利便性が向上する。  An information processing apparatus for a moving body according to the present invention includes: an imaging unit provided in the moving body, for capturing visible information; a storage unit for storing a plurality of pieces of visible information; and a visual information and storage unit for capturing the visible information. Since there are provided analysis means for comparing and analyzing the stored visible information, display means provided in the moving object, and display control means for displaying the analysis result of the analysis means on this display means, Since the contents of visible information can be easily stored and organized in the body, the range of use of the device is improved, and the convenience of the device is improved.
また、 この発明に係る移動体用情報処理装置は、 移動体内の前部中央 部に表示手段を設けるとともに、 撮像手段は表示手段の近傍に設け、 撮 像手段で撮影され解析手段で解析された結果を表示手段に表示可能に 構成したので、 移動体の前席の搭乗者が可視情報の記憶や整理を行なう ことができるため、 移動体内の座席において着座する割合が高い前席の 着座者への装置の操作性や利便性が向上する。  Further, in the information processing apparatus for a mobile object according to the present invention, the display means is provided in the front center portion of the mobile body, the imaging means is provided near the display means, and the image is taken by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means. The result is displayed on the display means, so that the passenger in the front seat of the mobile body can store and organize the visible information, so that the front seat occupants who have a high percentage of seats in the seat in the mobile body The operability and convenience of the device are improved.
また、 この発明に係る移動体用情報処理装置は、 移動体内の運転席と 助手席との間に挟まれる位置に設けられ、 表示部を有する配設手段と、 この配設手段を移動体の前後方向に沿って移動可能に案内する案内手 段とを設けるとともに、 撮像手段は配設手段の一部に設け、 撮像手段で 撮影され解析手段で解析された結果を表示部に表示可能に構成したの で、 移動体内のどの座席の着座者でも無理な姿勢をすることなく、 装置 を使用することができ、 装置の操作性が向上し、 使用者の利便性が向上 する。  Further, an information processing apparatus for a moving body according to the present invention is provided at a position sandwiched between a driver's seat and a passenger's seat in the moving body, and has an arrangement unit having a display unit; A guide means is provided to guide the robot so that it can move along the front-rear direction, and the imaging means is provided in a part of the arranging means. As a result, the device can be used without any uncomfortable posture in any seat in the moving body, and the operability of the device is improved, and the convenience of the user is improved.
また、 この発明に係る移動体用情報処理装置は、 解析手段の解析結果 が費用に関する情報の場合、 表示制御手段は費用管理が可能な表示を行 うようにするので、 通常、 自宅で行なっていたマネ一マネジメントが移 動体内で行なえ、 即ち、 外出した時など移動体内でその都度、 マネーマ ネジメントが行なえるので、 装置の使用範囲が向上し、 装置の利便性が さらに向上する。 In addition, the information processing apparatus for a mobile object according to the present invention may be configured such that: If the information is related to expenses, the display control means displays the information so that the expenses can be managed, so that the money management, which was normally performed at home, can be performed within the mobile unit, that is, when the user goes out of the mobile unit. In each case, the money management can be performed, so that the use range of the device is improved, and the convenience of the device is further improved.
また、 この発明に係る移動体用情報処理装置は、移動体内に設けられ、 可視情報を撮影する撮像手段と、 複数の可視情報を記憶した記憶手段と, 撮像手段が撮影した可視情報と記憶手段に記憶された可視情報とを比 較し解析する解析手段と、 移動体の現在位置とこの現在位置周辺の地図 情報とを表示させるナビゲーシヨン手段とを備え、 解析手段の解析結果 をナビゲ一シヨン手段の設定情報に用いるので、 複雑な設定操作の煩わ しさを解消でき、 使用者の利便性が向上するとともに、 装置の利便性が 向上する。  Also, the information processing apparatus for a mobile object according to the present invention is provided in the mobile object, an imaging unit that captures visible information, a storage unit that stores a plurality of visible information, and a storage unit that stores the visible information captured by the imaging unit. Analysis means for comparing and analyzing the visible information stored in the mobile device, and navigation means for displaying the current position of the moving object and map information around the current position, and providing a result of the analysis by the analysis means. Since it is used for the setting information of the means, the trouble of complicated setting operation can be eliminated, the convenience of the user is improved, and the convenience of the device is improved.
また、 この発明に係る移動体用情報処理装置は、'解析手段が解析した 可視情報の内容に基づき、 ナビゲーシヨン手段の設定情報に利用可能な 機能を表示する表示手段と、 この表示手段に表示された機能から所定の 機能を選択する選択手段とを設けたので、 使用者が全機能から選択する 手間が省け、 不要な操作を省略することにより使用者の利便性が向上す るとともに、 装置の利便性が向上する。  In addition, the information processing apparatus for a mobile object according to the present invention includes a display unit that displays a function available for setting information of the navigation unit based on the contents of the visible information analyzed by the analysis unit; A selection means for selecting a predetermined function from the selected functions is provided, so that the user is not required to select from all functions, and unnecessary operations are omitted, thereby improving the convenience for the user. The convenience of is improved.
また、 この発明に係る移動体用情報処理装置は、 解析手段の解析結果 が位置に関する情報の場合、 ナビゲ一シヨン手段の設定情報は、 位置情 報を目的地の位置情報とするので、 目的地の設定が簡単に行なえ、 使用 者の利便性がさらに向上する。  Also, in the mobile information processing apparatus according to the present invention, when the analysis result of the analysis means is information related to a position, the setting information of the navigation means uses the position information as the position information of the destination. Can be easily set, and the convenience for the user is further improved.
また、 この発明に係る移動体用情報処理装置は、 移動体内の前部中央 部に表示手段を設けるとともに、 撮像手段は表示手段の近傍に設け、 撮 像手段で撮影され解析手段で解析された結果を表示手段に表示可能に 構成し、 撮像手段と表示手段とを近くに配設したので、 撮像手段で撮影 しながら表示部の表示内容を確認しやすく、 使用者の利便性が向上する t さらに、 この発明に係る移動体用情報処理装置は、 移動体内の運転席 と助手席との間に挟まれる位置に設けられ、 表示部を有する配設手段と, この配設手段を移動体の前後方向に沿って移動可能に案内する案内手 段とを設けるとともに、 撮像手段は配設手段の一部に設け、 撮像手段で 撮影され解析手段で解析された結果を表示部に表示可能に構成したの で、 使用者の着座位置に関わらず、 撮像手段で撮影しながら表示部の表 示内容を確認しやすく、 使用者の利便性がさらに向上する。 図面の簡単な説明 Further, in the information processing apparatus for a mobile object according to the present invention, the display means is provided in the front center portion of the mobile body, the imaging means is provided near the display means, and the image is taken by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means. Results can be displayed on display Configured, since the arranged near the display means and the imaging means, easier to see the display contents of the display unit while photographing by the imaging means, further t convenience for the user is improved, moving body according to the present invention Information processing device is provided at a position between the driver's seat and the passenger's seat in the moving body, and has an arrangement means having a display unit, and the arrangement means can be moved along the front-rear direction of the moving body. In addition to providing guidance means for guiding, the imaging means is provided as a part of the arranging means, and the results taken by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display unit, so that the user can sit down Regardless of the position, it is easy to check the contents displayed on the display unit while photographing with the imaging means, and the convenience for the user is further improved. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
第 1図は、 実施の形態 1に係る移動体用情報処理装置及び移動体用機 器配設装置の概略構成を示す概略構成図である。  FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile information processing device and a mobile device arrangement device according to a first embodiment.
第 2図は、 第 1図の要部構成を示す要部構成図である。  FIG. 2 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of FIG.
第 3図は、 第 2図の要部を示す要部説明図である。  FIG. 3 is an explanatory view of a main part showing a main part of FIG.
第 4図は、 第 1図の要部構成を示す要部構成図である。  FIG. 4 is a main part configuration diagram showing the main part configuration of FIG.
第 5図は、 第 4図の要部の後面を示す要部後面図である。  FIG. 5 is a rear view of a main part showing a rear surface of the main part of FIG.
第 6図は、 第 4図の要部の側面断面を示す要部側面断面図である。 第 7図は、 第 1図の要部構成を示す要部構成図である。  FIG. 6 is a side sectional view of a main part showing a side cross section of the main part of FIG. FIG. 7 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of FIG.
第 8図は、 第 7図の要部の後面を示す要部後面図である。  FIG. 8 is a rear view of a main part showing a rear surface of the main part of FIG.
第 9図は、 第 7図の要部の側面断面を示す要部側面断面図である。 第 1 0図は、 第 7図の要部の後面断面を示す要部後面断面図である。 第 1 1図は、 実施の形態 1に係る移動体用機器配設装置の要部構成を 示すプロック図である。  FIG. 9 is a side sectional view of a main part showing a side cross section of the main part of FIG. FIG. 10 is a rear cross-sectional view of a main part showing a rear cross-section of the main part of FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a main part of the mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 1.
第 1 2図は、 第 1 1図の要部を示す要部説明図である。  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view of a principal part showing a principal part of FIG.
第 1 3図は、 実施の形態 1に係る移動体用情報処理装置及び移動体用 機器配設装置の動作の流れを示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a mobile information processing apparatus and a mobile information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 1. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation | movement of an apparatus arrangement apparatus.
第 1 4図は、 第 1図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部状態遷 移図である。  FIG. 14 is a state transition diagram of main parts showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.
第 1 5図は、 第 1 4図の要部の状態を示す要部状態図である。  FIG. 15 is a main part state diagram showing a state of main parts in FIG.
第 1 6図は、 第 1図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部状態遷 移図である。  FIG. 16 is a main state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.
第 1 7図は、 第 1 6図の要部の状態を示す要部状態図である。  FIG. 17 is a main part state diagram showing a state of main parts in FIG.
第 1 8図は、 第 1図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部状態遷 移図である。  FIG. 18 is a main state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.
第 1 9図は、 実施の形態 1に係る移動体用情報処理装置の要部構成を 示すブロック図である。  FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a main part configuration of a mobile information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 1.
第 2 0図は、 第 1 9図に使用される可視情報の例を示す説明図である 第 2 1図は、 実施の形態 1に係る移動体用情報処理装置の動作の流れ を示すフローチヤ一卜である。  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of visible information used in FIG. 19. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the mobile information processing apparatus according to the first embodiment. It is a bird.
第 2 2図は、 実施の形態 2に係る移動体用機器配設装置及び移動体用 表示装置の要部構成を示す要部構成図である。  FIG. 22 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of a mobile device installation device and a mobile body display device according to Embodiment 2.
第 2 3図は、 第 2 2図の要部を示す説明図である。  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.
第 2 4図は、 第 2 2図の要部を示す説明図である。  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.
第 2 5図は、 第 2 2図の要部を示す説明図である。  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.
第 2 6図は、 実施の形態 2に係る移動体用表示装置の要部構成を示す ブロック図である。  FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing a main part configuration of a display device for a mobile object according to the second embodiment.
第 2 7図は、 実施の形態 2に係る移動体用表示装置の動作の流れを示 すフ口一チヤ一トである。  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an operation flow of the display device for a mobile object according to the second embodiment.
第 2 8図は、 第 2 2図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部状態 遷移図である。  FIG. 28 is a main part state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.
第 2 9図は、 第 2 2図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部状態 遷移図である。 FIG. 29 is a main part state showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG. 22. It is a transition diagram.
第 3 0図は、 実施の形態 6に係る移動体用機器配設装置及び移動体用 表示装置の概略構成を示す概略構成図である。  FIG. 30 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device installation device and a mobile device display device according to Embodiment 6.
第 3 1図は、 実施の形態 6に係る移動体用表示装置の要部構成を示す ブロック図である。  FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of a display device for a moving object according to the sixth embodiment.
第 3 2図は、 実施の形態 6に係る移動体用表示装置の動作の流れを示 すフローチヤ一トである。  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.
第 3 3図は、 第 3 0図の要部を示す要部説明図である。  FIG. 33 is an explanatory view of a principal part showing a principal part of FIG. 30.
第 3 4図は、 第 3 3図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部状態 遷移図である。  FIG. 34 is a main part state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG. 33.
第 3 5図は、 実施の形態 6に係る移動体用表示装置が出力した可視情 報を表示した例を示す説明図である。  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of displaying the visible information output by the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.
第 3 6図は、 実施の形態 6に係る移動体用表示装置が出力した可視情 報を表示した例を示す説明図である。  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the visible information output by the mobile object display device according to Embodiment 6 is displayed.
第 3 7図は、 実施の形態 7に係る移動体用表示装置の概略構成を示す 概略構成図である。  FIG. 37 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device for a moving object according to Embodiment 7.
第 3 8図は、 実施の形態 7に係る移動体用表示装置及び移動体用機器 配設装置の要部を示す説明図である。  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of a display device for a mobile object and a device installation device for the mobile object according to the seventh embodiment.
第 3 9図は、 第 3 8図の表示例を拡大した説明図である。  FIG. 39 is an enlarged explanatory view of the display example of FIG. 38.
第 4 0図は、 実施の形態 8に係る移動体用機器配設装置の概略構成を 示すプロック図である。  FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 8.
第 4 1図は、 第 4 0図の表示例を示した説明図である。  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of FIG. 40.
第 4 2図は、 実施の形態 8に係る移動体用機器配設装置の動作の流れ を示すフローチヤ—トである。  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an operation flow of the mobile device installation apparatus according to Embodiment 8.
第 4 3図は、 実施の形態 9に係る移動体用情報処理装置の概略構成を 示すブロック図である。 第 4 4図は、 第 4 3図の表示例を示した説明図である。 FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile object information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 9. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of FIG. 43.
第 4 5図は、 実施の形態 9に係る移動体用情報処理装置の動作の流れ を示すフロ一チヤ一卜である。  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow of the operation of the information processing apparatus for a mobile body according to the ninth embodiment.
第 4 6図は、 従来の移動体内部の要部を示す要部詳細図である。 第 4 7図は、 従来の移動体内部の要部を示す要部詳細図である。 第 4 8図は、 従来の移動体内に設けられた要部の構成を示す構成図で ある。  FIG. 46 is a detailed view of a main part showing a main part inside a conventional moving body. FIG. 47 is a detailed view of a main part showing a main part inside a conventional moving body. FIG. 48 is a configuration diagram showing a configuration of a main part provided in a conventional moving body.
第 4 9図は、 従来の移動体内に設けられた要部を示す要部説明図であ る。  FIG. 49 is an explanatory view of main parts showing main parts provided in a conventional moving body.
第 5 0図は、 従来の要部の断面を示す要部断面図である。  FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a conventional main part.
第 5 1図は、 従来の移動体内に設けられた要部の分解構成を示す分解 構成図である。  FIG. 51 is an exploded configuration diagram showing an exploded configuration of a main part provided in a conventional moving body.
第 5 2図は、 従来の要部の断面を示す要部断面図である。  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a conventional main part.
第 5 3図は、 従来の要部の表示例を示す説明図である。  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a conventional main part.
第 5 4図は、 従来の要部を示す要部説明図である。  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of a main part showing a conventional main part.
第 5 5図は、 従来の全体構成を示すブロック図である。 発明を実施するための最良の形態  FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing the entire configuration of the related art. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
以下、 この発明をより詳細に説述するために、 この発明を実施するた めの最良の形態について、 添付の図面に従ってこれを説明する。  Hereinafter, in order to explain this invention in greater detail, the preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings.
実施の形態 1 . Embodiment 1
第 1図は実施の形態 1に係る移動体用情報処理装置及び移動体用機 器配設装置の概略構成を示す概略構成図、 第 2図は第 1図の要部構成を 示す要部構成図、 第 3図は第 2図の要部を示す要部説明図である。  FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile information processing device and a mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 1, and FIG. 2 is a main configuration showing a main configuration of FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory view of a main part showing the main part of FIG.
これら第 1図〜第 3図において、 1 0 0は移動体としての自動車であ り、 この実施の形態 1では、 6人乗車可能なミニバンタイプの自動車と して説明している。 1 0 1は自動車 1 0 0のフロントガラス、 1 0 2は 自動車 1 0 0の車室前方に設けられた樹脂等で形成されたィンストウ ルメントパネル、 1 0 3はィンストウルメントパネル 1 0 2の運転席側 (後述する) に設けられたスピードメ一夕ゃタコメータ等のメータ類が 配置されるコンビネーションメータパネル、 1 0 4はハンドルである。 In FIGS. 1 to 3, reference numeral 100 denotes an automobile as a moving object. In the first embodiment, a minivan-type automobile capable of riding six people is used. Has been explained. 101 is a windshield of the automobile 100, 102 is an instrument panel made of resin or the like provided in front of the cabin of the automobile 100, and 103 is an instrument panel. A combination meter panel on the driver's seat side (described later) on which meters such as a speedometer and a tachometer are arranged, and 104 is a steering wheel.
また、 1 0 5はィンストウルメントパネル 1 0 2の上面部であるダッ シュポ一ド、 1 0 6はィンストウルメントパネル 1 0 2の略中央部に設 けられた表示装置、 1 0 7は横一列でそれぞれが等間隔で設けられた操 作部であり、 この操作部 1 0 7には、 本実施の形態 1では、 緊急時に押 圧操作することにより外部の連絡センターに自動接続され緊急状況下 であることを通報するエマージェンシーコールシステムを作動させる 操作部や、 非常停止を車外に伝達する八ザ一ドランプの点灯/消灯の操 作を行なう操作部や、 外部の電子手帳 (P D A) のデ一夕を取り込ませ る操作部等が設けられている。  In addition, reference numeral 105 denotes a dash pad on the upper surface of the instrument panel 102, reference numeral 106 denotes a display device provided at a substantially central portion of the instrument panel 102, Reference numeral 7 denotes operating units which are provided in a row in a row and are provided at equal intervals.In the first embodiment, the operating unit 107 is automatically connected to an external contact center by performing a pressing operation in an emergency. An operation unit that activates the emergency call system that reports an emergency situation, an operation unit that turns on / off the emergency lamp that transmits an emergency stop to the outside of the vehicle, an external electronic notebook (PDA) An operation unit is provided to allow the user to capture the data of the day.
また、 1 0 8は撮像手段としてのカメラ、 1 0 9は後述するセン夕一 コンソールュニッ卜 2 0 0が最前部まで移動された際、 内部に収納され る収納スペース、 1 1 0はセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0を自動車 1 0 0の前後方向、 即ち、 第 1図の A方向または B方向に移動可能に案 内する案内手段としてのレール部である。  Reference numeral 108 denotes a camera as an imaging means, reference numeral 109 denotes a storage space to be stored inside when the console unit 200 described later is moved to the forefront, and reference numeral 110 denotes a center console. It is a rail section as a guide means that is capable of moving the unit 200 in the front-rear direction of the automobile 100, that is, in the direction A or B in FIG.
このレール部 1 1 0は、第 3図に示すように、内部に溝部が形成され、 自動車室内の床部に配設されており、 溝部の底部には、 レール部 1 1 0 の長手方向と垂直方向に等間隔のスリット状に形成されており、 これが 嚙合部 1 1 1となっている。  As shown in FIG. 3, the rail portion 110 has a groove formed therein and is disposed on the floor in the vehicle interior. The bottom of the groove has the same length as the rail 110 in the longitudinal direction. It is formed in the shape of a slit at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and this is the joint portion 111.
また、 1 2 0は前席であり、 この前席 1 2 0は運転席 1 2 1と助手席 1 2 2とで構成されている。 1 3 0は中間席であり、 この中間席 1 3 0 も前席 1 2 0と同様に運転席側 1 2 1、 即ち、 第 1図上では右側の席 1 3 1と、 助手席側 1 2 2、 即ち、 第 1図上では左側の席 1 3 2とで構成 されており、 さらに、 図示していないが、 中間席 1 3 0の後ろ側には、 後席が設けられており、 前席 1 2 0や中間席 1 3 0と同様に 2席から構 成されている。 Further, 120 is a front seat, and the front seat 120 is composed of a driver seat 121 and a passenger seat 122. 130 is the middle seat, and this middle seat 130 is also the driver side 1 2 1 like the front seat 120, that is, the right seat 1 in FIG. 1 and the passenger seat side 1 2 2, that is, the left seat 13 2 in FIG. 1, and furthermore, although not shown, the middle seat 130 There are rear seats, and there are two seats, like the front seats 120 and the middle seats 130.
また、インストウルメントパネル 1 0 2内部には、図示していないが、 自動車に搭載されている全ての機器の制御を統括している中央制,御手 段と、 ディスプレイ等の表示手段を制御する表示制御手段と、 音声出力 を行なうスピーカの音量を制御する音量制御手段と、 自動車 1 0 0に搭 載されたエンジンの動作を制御するエンジン制御手段と、 自動車 1 0 0 に搭載されたエアコンディショナー (エアコン) の動作制御を行なうェ アコン制御手段等が設けられており、 これら表示制御手段、 音量制御手 段、 エンジン制御手段、 エアコン制御手段は、 中央制御手段の動作指令 に基づいて制御されるように構成され、 中央制御手段はセンターコンソ ールュニット 2 0 0に配設された音響機器や映像機器等に対しても所 定の動作制御が行われるようになつているため、 自動車内の搭乗者が操 作手段 2 3 0を操作することにより、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0内に設けられた C Dプレーヤやカセットテーププレーヤ、 D V Dプレ 一ャ等を動作させて、 可聴情報は、 中央制御手段の指令に基づき、 スピ —力への音量の制御が行なわれてスピー力から音声が出力されるよう になっている。  Although not shown, the instrument panel 102 controls a central control system, which controls the control of all devices mounted on the vehicle, and display means such as a display. Display control means, volume control means for controlling the volume of a speaker for outputting sound, engine control means for controlling the operation of the engine mounted on the automobile 100, and air conditioner mounted on the automobile 100 Air conditioner control means for controlling the operation of the (air conditioner) are provided. These display control means, volume control means, engine control means, and air conditioner control means are controlled based on operation commands from the central control means. The central control means also performs predetermined operation control on audio equipment, video equipment, and the like provided in the center console unit 200. As the passenger in the car operates the operating means 230, the CD player, cassette tape player, DVD player, etc. provided in the center console unit 200 operate. In the audible information, the volume of the audible information is controlled based on the command of the central control means, and the sound is output from the loudspeaker.
なお、 操作手段 1 0 7を操作した際も上記と同様に可聴情報は、 中央 制御手段の指令に基づき、 スピーカへの音量の制御が行なわれてスピー 力から音声が出力されるようになっている。 - また、 操作手段 2 3 0の操作に基づき、 可視情報も、 中央制御手段の 指令に基づき、 表示手段 2 2 0への表示制御を行い、 表示手段 2 2 0に 可視情報が表示されるようになっている。 なお、 操作手段 1 0 7を操作 した際も可聴情報と同様に中央制御手段の指令に基づき、 スピーカへの 音量の制御が行なわれてスピーカから音声が出力されるようになって いる。 When the operating means 107 is operated, the audible information is controlled in the same manner as described above by controlling the volume of the loudspeaker based on a command from the central control means and outputting sound from the speaker. I have. -Also, based on the operation of the operation means 230, the visible information is also displayed on the display means 220 based on the command of the central control means, so that the visible information is displayed on the display means 220. It has become. Operate the operating means 107 In this case, the volume of the speaker is controlled based on a command from the central control means in the same manner as the audible information, and the speaker outputs sound.
次に、 第 2図、 第 3図を用いてセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0に ついて説明する。  Next, the center console unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 and FIG.
第 2図はセン夕一コンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0の全体構成を示す全体 構成図、 第 3図は第 2図に示すセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0とレ —ル部 1 1 0との関係を示す関係図である。  FIG. 2 is an overall configuration diagram showing the entire configuration of the center console unit 200, and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between the center console unit 200 and the rail unit 110 shown in FIG. FIG.
2 0 0はセンターコンソ一ルュニットであり、 センタ一コンソールュ ニッ トの筐体部 2 1 0と、 この筐体部 2 1 0の一部に開口部 2 1 2が形 成され、 この開口部 2 1 2内に収納可能に設けられ、 使用時には筐体部 2 1 0の上面 2 1 1の上方に突出する第 2表示手段としてのディスプ レイ 2 2 0と、 筐体部 2 1 0の一部に開口部 2 1 3が形成され、 この開 口部 2 1 3内に収納可能に設けられ、 使用時には筐体部 2 1 0の上面 2 1 1の上方に突出する操作部 2 3 0と、 コンソールュニット 2 0 0を A 方向に移動させる際に操作する操作部 2 4 1と、 コンソールュニット 2 0 0を B方向に移動させる際に操作する操作部 2 4 2と、 音響装置や映 像装置に C Dや M Dや D V D等の記憶媒体を挿入する揷入口 2 4 3と、 筐体部 2 1 0の前面部に取り付けられた撮像手段としてのカメラ 2 5 0とで構成されている。 また、 筐体部 2 1 0の上面 2 1 1には複数の開 口部 2 1 4が形成されており、 これら複数の開口部には I Cカードのよ うなメモリ力一ドがそれぞれ挿入できる揷入口となっており、 本実施の 形態では 5枚のメモリカードが挿入可能となっている。  Reference numeral 200 denotes a center console unit, which has a housing 210 of the center console unit and an opening 211 formed in a part of the housing 210. A display 22 which is provided so as to be housed in the housing 2 and protrudes above the upper surface 211 of the housing 210 when used, and a part of the housing 210 as a second display means. An opening 2 13 is formed in the opening 2 13, and is provided so as to be housed in the opening 2 13, and when used, an operating section 2 30 protruding above the upper surface 2 11 of the housing 2 1 0, An operation unit 241 for operating the console unit 200 in the direction A; an operation unit 242 for operating the console unit 200 in the direction B; A storage medium such as a CD, MD, or DVD is inserted into the imaging device. An entrance 243 and a camera 225 as an imaging means attached to the front of the housing 210 It is configured. Also, a plurality of openings 216 are formed in the upper surface 211 of the housing 210, and a memory card such as an IC card can be inserted into each of these openings. It is an entrance, and in this embodiment, five memory cards can be inserted.
ここで、 第 4図〜第 1 0図を用いて表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0につ いて説明する。  Here, the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 10.
第 4図はセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0の要部である表示部 2 2 0の後面斜視図、 第 5図は表示部 2 2 0の背面を示す背面図、 第 6図 は表示部 2 2 0の側断面を示す側断面図である。 Fig. 4 shows the display unit 2 which is the main part of the center console unit 200. 20 is a rear perspective view, FIG. 5 is a rear view showing the back of the display section 220, and FIG. 6 is a side sectional view showing a side section of the display section 220.
また、 第 7図はセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0の要部である操作 部 2 3 0の外観を示す要部外観図、 第 8図は第 7図に示す操作部 2 3 0 の裏面の概略構成を示す裏面概略構成図、 第 9図は操作部 2 3 0の側面 断面を示す側面断面図、 第 1 0図は操作部 2 3 0の正面断面を示す正面 断面図である。  FIG. 7 is an external view of a main part showing an external appearance of an operation part 230 which is a main part of the center console unit 200, and FIG. 8 is a schematic view of a back surface of the operation part 230 shown in FIG. 9 is a side cross-sectional view showing a side cross-section of the operation unit 230, and FIG. 10 is a front cross-sectional view showing a front cross-section of the operation unit 230.
表示部 2 2 0の支持部 2 2 2の下方には表示部 2 2 0の駆動機構が 設けられており、 この駆動機構は、 一面に嚙合部 2 2 3 aを形成した櫛 状部 2 2 3と、 この櫛状部 2 2 3に形成された嚙合部 2 2 3 aと嚙合す るように、 筐体部 2 1 0内に設けられ、 一部に嚙合部 2 2 4 aが形成さ れた駆動部 2 2 4とで構成されている。  A drive mechanism for the display section 220 is provided below the support section 222 of the display section 220. The drive mechanism includes a comb-like section 22 having a joint section 230 on one surface. 3 is provided in the housing portion 210 so as to mate with the joint portion 2 23 a formed on the comb-like portion 2 23, and the joint portion 224 a is formed partially. Drive unit 2 24.
この駆動部 2 2 4の嚙合部 2 2 4 aと櫛状部 2 2 3の嚙合部 2 2 3 aとが嚙合し、 駆動部 2 2 4の E方向または F方向への回動駆動により 櫛状部 2 2 3も H方向または G方向への上下移動が行われる。 また、 筐 体部 2 1 0の内部は断層状の中空形状になっており、 一端が筐体部 2 1 0の上面 2 1 1に固定され、 他端が筐体部 2 1 0の 1層目の上面 2 1 6 に固定され表示部 2 2 0を支持する棒状支持部 2 2 5、 2 2 6を設けて いる。 なお、 これら棒状支持部 2 2 5、 2 2 6は表示部 2 2 0の支持部 2 2 2に形成された孔 2 2 2 a、 2 2 2 bのそれぞれに嵌入されており、 表示部 2 2 0がぐらつくことを防止するものとなっている。  The joining portion 2 24 a of the driving portion 2 24 and the joining portion 2 2 3 a of the comb portion 2 2 3 are joined together, and the driving portion 2 The shape part 2 23 also moves up and down in the H direction or the G direction. Also, the inside of the housing part 210 has a hollow shape like a fault, one end of which is fixed to the upper surface 211 of the housing part 210, and the other end is a single layer of the housing part 210. Bar-shaped support portions 225 and 226 fixed to the upper surface 216 of the eye and supporting the display portion 220 are provided. In addition, these rod-shaped support portions 2 25 and 2 26 are fitted into holes 22 a and 22 b formed in the support portion 222 of the display portion 220, respectively. It is intended to prevent wobbling of 20.
第 7図に示すように、 表示部.2 2 0の表示面側は櫛状部 2 2 3より左 側、 即ち、 自動車内の後方側に配置されている。  As shown in FIG. 7, the display surface side of the display section .220 is disposed on the left side of the comb section 223, that is, on the rear side in the automobile.
操作部 2 3 0の操作面 2 3 1には、 自動車に設けられているエアコン (図示せず) の動作制御の操作を行なうエアコン操作部 2 3 2と、 所定 の操作を行なう際に表示部 2 2 0の表示面 2 2 2に表示されたメニュ 一画面から所望の内容を選択して実行させる操作を行なう突起部が中 央に形成されたジョイスティック 2 3 3と、 センタ一コンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0内に収納された音響機器や映像再生装置 (図示せず) の動作制 御の操作を行なう A V機器操作部 2 3 4と、 0〜 9までの 1 0キーと送 信キーと終了キーを設け、 自動車内に設置されたハンズフリ一電話 (図 示せず) やナビゲ一シヨン装置の番号入力、 また計算を行なったりする 際に操作する操作部 2 3 5である。 なお、 操作面 2 3 1には、 傾斜が付 けられている。 An operation surface 2 31 of the operation unit 230 is provided with an air conditioner operation unit 2 32 for operating operation of an air conditioner (not shown) provided in the automobile, and a display unit for performing a predetermined operation. The menu displayed on the 2 2 0 display surface 2 2 2 A joystick 2 33 with a projection formed at the center for selecting and executing desired contents from one screen, and an audio device or video playback device housed in the center console unit 200 An AV device operation section 234 for performing operation control operations (not shown), a 10 key from 0 to 9, a transmission key and an end key are provided, and a hands-free telephone (shown in FIG. This is the operation unit 235 that is operated when inputting the number of the navigation device and performing calculations. Note that the operation surface 231 is inclined.
また、 第 8図に示すように操作部 2 3 0の裏面 2 3 6には、 操作部 2 3 0の駆動機構が構成されており、 この駆動機構は、 弧状に形成され一 面に嚙合部 2 3 7 aが形成された櫛状部 2 3 7と、 筐体部 2 1 0内に設 けられ、 一部に嚙合部 2 3 8 aが形成された駆動部 2 3 8とで構成され ている。 また、 一部には内部に回動軸 (図示せず) が嵌入され、 操作部 2 3 0が筐体部 2 1 0から突出したり筐体部 2 1 0内に収納したりす る際の支点となる軸受部 2 3 9 a、 2 3 9 bが形成されており、 この軸 受部 2 3 9 a、 2 3 9 bの対面には、 操作部 2 3 0が筐体部 2 1 0から 外れないよう筐体部 2 1 0の内部に形成された係止部 2 1 1 aに係止 する係止部 2 3 9 c、 2 3 9 dが形成されている。  As shown in FIG. 8, a drive mechanism of the operation unit 230 is formed on the back surface 236 of the operation unit 230, and the drive mechanism is formed in an arc shape and has a joint portion on one surface. It is composed of a comb-shaped part 237 formed with 237a, and a drive part 238 provided in the housing part 210 and partially formed with a coupling part 238a. ing. In addition, a rotation shaft (not shown) is fitted into a part, and a fulcrum when the operation part 230 projects from the housing part 210 or is stored in the housing part 210. The bearings 239a and 239b are formed, and on the opposite side of the bearings 239a and 239b, the operation unit 230 is attached to the housing unit 210. Locking portions 239c and 239d are formed to lock with locking portions 211a formed inside the housing portion 210 so as not to come off.
このように構成しているため、 操作部 2 3 0は駆動部 2 3 8の嚙合部 2 3 8 aと櫛状部 2 3 7の嚙合部 2 3 7 aとが嚙合し、 駆動部 2 3 8の I方向または J方向への回動駆動により櫛状部 2 2 3も J方向または I方向への弧を描くような移動が行われる。  Due to such a configuration, the operation part 230 is formed by combining the joint part 238a of the drive part 238 with the joint part 237a of the comb-like part 237. The comb-shaped portion 223 is also moved by drawing an arc in the J direction or the I direction by the rotation drive of the 8 in the I direction or the J direction.
また、 ディスプレイ 2 2 0は筐体部 2 1 0がレール部 1 1 0のどこの 位置に位置しているかにより、 H方向に移動して筐体部 2 1 0の上面 2 1 1からディスプレイ 2 2 0の表示面 2 2 1が突出されたり、 G方向に 移動して筐体部 2 1 0の中に収納されるように構成されており、 また、 操作部 2 3 0も筐体部 2 1 0がレール部 1 1 0のどこの位置に位置し ているかにより、 I方向に移動して筐体部 2 1 0の上面 2 1 1から操作 部 2 3 0の操作面 2 3 1が突出されたり、 J方向に移動して筐体部 2 1 0の中に収納されるよう構成されている。 Also, the display 220 moves in the H direction depending on the position of the housing section 210 on the rail section 110 and moves from the top surface 211 of the housing section 210 to the display 2. The display surface 2 21 of 20 is projected or moved in the G direction to be housed in the housing 2 10, and The operation unit 230 also moves in the I direction depending on the position of the housing unit 210 on the rail unit 110, and moves from the upper surface 211 of the housing unit 210 to the operation unit 2 The 30 operation surface 2 31 is configured to protrude or move in the J direction to be housed in the housing 2 10.
ここで、 レール部 1 1 0とセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0との関 係について説明すると、 筐体部 2 1 0の下面 2 1 5にはレール部 1 1 0 内部の溝部に形成された係止部 1 1. 1と嚙合するよう周面部に嚙合部 2 0 2が形成された回動動作可能な車輪部 2 0 1が設けられ、 車輪部 2 0 1には駆動部 (図示せず) が内蔵されており、 この駆動部が回動動作 することにより車輪部 2 0 1が回動動作する。  Here, the relationship between the rail portion 110 and the center console unit 200 will be described. The lower surface 215 of the housing portion 210 has a structure formed in a groove inside the rail portion 110. A rotatable wheel portion 201 having a joint portion 202 formed on a peripheral surface portion to be engaged with the stop portion 1.1.1 is provided, and the wheel portion 201 has a drive unit (not shown). Is built in, and the wheel unit 201 rotates by the rotation of the driving unit.
ここで、 車輪部 2 0 1は周面部に形成された嚙合部 2 0 2とレール部 1 1 0に形成された係止部 1 1 1とが嚙合しているため、 駆動部が回転 すると、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0が A方向または B方向に移 動することとなる。 即ち、 第 2図に示すように、 操作部からの指令に基 づき、 車輪部 2 0 1が G方向に回転動作すると、 センタ一コンソールュ ニット 2 0 0が A方向に移動し、 逆に、 車輪部 2 0 1が H方向に回転動 作すると、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0が B方向に移動動作する 一方、 駆動部の回動動作がない場合は、 車輪部 2 0 1はレール部 1 1 0と嚙合しているため、 A方向にも B方向にも移動しないこととなり、 駆動部の停止位置でセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0が位置決めさ れるようになっている。  Here, in the wheel portion 201, the coupling portion 202 formed on the peripheral surface portion and the locking portion 111 formed on the rail portion 110 are combined, so that when the driving portion rotates, The center console unit 200 moves in the A or B direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 2, when the wheel unit 201 rotates in the G direction based on a command from the operation unit, the center console unit 200 moves in the A direction, and conversely, the wheel unit When the unit 201 rotates in the H direction, the center console unit 200 moves in the B direction. On the other hand, when there is no rotation of the drive unit, the wheel unit 201 becomes the rail unit 1 1. Since it is coincident with 0, it does not move in either the A direction or the B direction, and the center console unit 200 is positioned at the stop position of the drive unit.
また、 センターコンソールユニット 2 0 0を使用していない際は、 第 図に示すように、 センターコンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0が空間スペース 1 1 0内に収容されている (センタ一コンソールュニッ卜 2 0 0の初期位 置) 。  When the center console unit 200 is not used, the center console unit 200 is accommodated in the space 110 as shown in FIG. Initial position of 0).
次に、 センタ一コンソールユニット 2 0 0の動作について、 詳細に説 明する。 Next, the operation of the center console unit 200 will be described in detail. I will tell.
第 1 1図は実施の形態 1に係る移動体用機器配設装置の動作制御を 行う主要部分の構成を示すブロック図、 第 1 2図は第 1 1図の要部の説 明を行なう要部説明図、 第 1 3図は実施の形態 1に係る移動体用機器配 設装置の動作の流れを示すフローチャートであり、 まず、 センターコン ソールュニット 2 0 0の動作制御を行う要部構成について説明する。  FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a main part for controlling the operation of the mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 1, and FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the main parts of FIG. 11. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the operation flow of the mobile device installation apparatus according to Embodiment 1. First, the main configuration for controlling the operation of the center console unit 200 will be described. I do.
2 4 1、 2 4 2は操作部であり、 第 1図に示す A方向にセンターコン ソールュニット 2 0 0を移動させる際は、 操作部 2 4 1を押圧操作し、 B方向に移動させる際は操作部 2 4 2を押圧操作を行うことによって、 所定の指令信号が出力される。 ここで、 本発明の実施の形態 1では操作 部 2 4 1、 2 4 2を所定時間以内 (例えば、 2秒以内) に連続的に押圧 操作した際は、 その押圧操作の回数をカウントして後述する設定値選択 手段 1 1 0 1が、 センタ一コンゾールユニット 2 0 0の設定位置が決定 するようになつている。  Reference numerals 241, 242 denote operation units.When the center console unit 200 is moved in the direction A shown in FIG. 1, the operation unit 241 is pressed and when the center console unit 200 is moved in the B direction. By performing a pressing operation on the operation unit 242, a predetermined command signal is output. Here, in Embodiment 1 of the present invention, when the operation units 241, 242 are continuously pressed within a predetermined time (for example, within 2 seconds), the number of times of the pressing operation is counted. A setting value selecting means 1101, described later, determines the setting position of the center-consol unit 200.
この設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1は、 操作部 2 4 1、 2 4 2が出力した指 令信号に基づき、 記憶手段 1 1 0 2 (後述する) に記憶された移動設定 値から所定の設定値を選択し、 この設定値を出力するものである。 1 1 0 2は自動車室内に設けられた各座席 1 2 0、 1 3 0の位置それぞれに, 車輪部 2 0 1が移動する方向及び距離と、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0に設けられた表示部 2 2 0をセンタ一コンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0の上面から突出させるか否かの設定値と、 センタ一コンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0に設けられた操作部 2 3 0をセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0の上面から突出させるか否かの設定値とを対応させて記憶した記 憶手段であり、 第 1 2図に示すように記憶されている。  This set value selection means 1 101 sets a predetermined setting from the movement set value stored in the storage means 110 (described later) based on the command signal output from the operation units 24 1 and 24 2. Select a value and output this set value. 1102 is provided in the center and console unit 200, in the direction and distance in which the wheel unit 201 moves, at each of the positions of the seats 120 and 130 provided in the car interior. The set value of whether or not the display unit 220 projects from the upper surface of the center console unit 200, and the operation unit 230 provided on the center console unit 200 are displayed on the center console unit 200. This is storage means for storing a set value of whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of 0 in association with each other, and is stored as shown in FIG.
この第 1 2図に記憶されている内容を説明すると、 センターコンソ一 ルュニット 2 0 0には固定箇所として 5つのポジションがあり、 第 1ポ ジションは初期位置であり、 セン夕一コンソールュニット 2 0 0が収納 スペース 1 0 9内に収納されており、 レール部 1 1 0の最前部に位置し ている。 このため、 センターコンソールユニット 2 0 0の移動設定値は 第 1ポジションを 0 c mとし、 表示部 2 2 0は筐体部 2 1 0内に収納さ れ、 操作部 2 3 0も筐体部 2 1 0内に収納されている。 この第 1ポジシ ョンはどの座席位置にも対応していない。 Explaining the contents stored in FIG. 12, the center console 200 has five fixed positions, and the first position The station is in the initial position, and the console unit 200 is stored in the storage space 109, and is located at the forefront of the rail section 110. For this reason, the movement setting value of the center console unit 200 is set to 0 cm at the first position, the display unit 220 is housed in the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 is also in the housing unit 2. Stored in 10. This first position does not correspond to any seating position.
第 2ポジションは運転席対応のポジションであり、 第 1ポジションを 基準に第 1図に示す A方向に 5 c m移動する移動設定値が設定されて おり、 表示部 2 2 0は筐体部 2 1 0内に収納され、 操作部 2 3 0は筐体 部 2 1 0の上面から所定の傾斜角度 0を有するよう突出されるように なっている。  The second position is a position corresponding to the driver's seat, and a movement setting value for moving by 5 cm in the direction A shown in Fig. 1 based on the first position is set, and the display unit 220 is the housing unit 21. The operation unit 230 is housed in the housing unit 0 so as to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 so as to have a predetermined inclination angle 0.
また、 第 3ポジションは助手席対応のポジションであり、 第 1ポジシ ョンを基準に第 1図に示す A方向に 1 5 c m移動する移動設定値が設 定されており、 表示部 2 2 0は筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出されるよう になっており、 操作部 2 3 0も筐体部 2 1 0の上面から所定の傾斜を有 するよう突出される。  Also, the third position is a position corresponding to the passenger seat, and a movement set value for moving by 15 cm in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the first position is set. Is projected from the upper surface of the housing portion 210, and the operation portion 230 is also projected from the upper surface of the housing portion 210 so as to have a predetermined inclination.
また、 第 4ポジションは中間席対応のポジションであり、 第 1ポジシ ヨンを基準に第 1図に示す A方向に 6 0 c m移動する移動設定値が設 定されており、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0は、 筐体部 2 1 0の上面か ら突出されるようになつている。 この際、 中間席の左右どちらの席にも、 この第 4ポジションが対応している。  The fourth position is a position corresponding to the middle seat, and a movement set value for moving 60 cm in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the first position is set. The operation section 230 is configured to protrude from the upper surface of the housing section 210. In this case, the fourth position corresponds to both the left and right middle seats.
さらに、 図示はしていないが、 第 5ポジションは後席対応であり、 第 1ポジションを基準に第 1図に示す A方向に 1 2 0 c m移動する移動 設定値が設定されており、 第 4ポジションと同様に表示部 2 2 0と操作 部 2 3 0は、 筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出されるようになつている。 こ の際、後席の左右どちらの席にも、 この第 4ポジションが対応している。 これら第 1ポジション〜第 5ポジションは、 センターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0に設けられた操作手段 2 4 1、 2 4 2の所定時間内に連続する 操作回数により決められるものであり、 例えば、 センターコンソールュ ニッ ト 2 0 0が第 1ポジションに設定されている際、 操作手段 2 4 1に 対し、 連続した押圧操作が 3回あった場合、 第 2ポジション、 第 3ポジ ションを経て、 第 4ポジションに設定される。 逆に、 センタ一コンソ一 ルユニット 2 0 0がこの状態、 即ち、 第 4ポジションの際、 操作手段 2 4 2に対し、 連続した押圧操作が 2回あった場合、 第 3ポジションを経 て第 2ポジションに設定されるようになっている。 Further, although not shown, the fifth position is for rear seats, and a movement set value for moving 120 cm in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the first position is set. Similarly to the position, the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are configured to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210. In this case, the fourth position corresponds to both the left and right rear seats. These first to fifth positions are determined by the number of consecutive operations within a predetermined time of the operation means 241 and 242 provided in the center console unit 200. When the console unit 200 is set to the first position, if there are three consecutive pressing operations on the operating means 241, the second and third positions are passed to the fourth Set to position. Conversely, when the center console unit 200 is in this state, that is, in the fourth position, if the operating means 242 is subjected to two consecutive pressing operations, it passes through the third position to the second position. It is set to the position.
ここで、 1ポジションごとに移動させた場合は、以下のとおりとなる。 即ち、 センタ一コンソールユニット 2 0 0を使用していない際には、 セ ンタ一コンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0は第 1 4図に示すように、 インストウ ルメントパネルの中央下部に収納されており (第 1ポジション) 、 セン ターコンソールュニット 2 0 0の表示部 2 2 0、 操作部 2 3 0の動作状 態は第 1 5図に示すとおりである。  Here, when it is moved for each position, it is as follows. That is, when the center-console unit 200 is not used, the center-console unit 200 is housed in the lower center of the instrument panel as shown in FIG. The operation state of the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 of the center console unit 200 is as shown in FIG.
この際、 操作部 2 4 1への押圧操作が 1回、 即ち A方向への 1ポジシ ョン分の移動を指令する操作があると、 車輪部 2 0 1が回転して第 1ポ ジションから運転席対応である第 1 6図に示す位置まで移動する (第 2 ポジション) 。 この際のセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0の表示部 2 2 0、 操作部 2 3 0の動作状態は第 1 7図に示すとおりである。  At this time, if there is one pressing operation on the operation part 241, that is, an operation to command movement of one position in the A direction, the wheel part 201 rotates and the first part is moved from the first position. Move to the position shown in Fig. 16 corresponding to the driver's seat (second position). At this time, the operation states of the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 of the center console unit 200 are as shown in FIG.
また、 上記と同様に操作部 2 4 1への押圧操作が 1回あると、 上記と 同様に第 2ポジションから 1ポジション分、 A方向に移動して助手席対 応である第 1図に示す位置まで移動する (第 3ポジション) 。 この際の セン夕一コンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0の動作状態は第 2図に示すとおり である。  Similarly, if there is a single pressing operation on the operation unit 241 as in the above, it moves in the A direction by one position from the second position in the same manner as above, and is shown in FIG. Move to the position (3rd position). At this time, the operating state of the console console 200 is as shown in FIG.
さらに、 上記と同様に 1ポジション分の移動を指令する操作があると、 第 3ポジションから 1ポジション分、 A方向に移動して中間席対応であ る第 1 8図に示す位置まで移動する (第 4ポジション) 。 この際のセン 夕一コンソールュニット 2 0 0の動作状態も第 2図に示すとおりであ る。 Furthermore, if there is an operation to command the movement of one position as in the above, Move one position from the third position in the A direction to the position shown in Fig. 18 corresponding to the middle seat (fourth position). At this time, the operation state of the console unit 200 is also as shown in FIG.
また、 第 1 8図に示す位置から、 さらに 1ポジション分の移動を指令 する操作があると、 図示しないが第 4ポジションから A方向に移動して 後席対応の位置まで移動する (第 5ポジション) 。 この際のセンタ一コ ンソールュニット 2 0 0の動作状態も第 2図に示すとおりである。  Also, if there is an operation to command the movement of one more position from the position shown in Fig. 18, it moves from the fourth position in the direction A (not shown) to the position corresponding to the rear seat (not shown). ). The operating state of the center console unit 200 at this time is also as shown in FIG.
逆に、 B方向へ移動する際は、 上述した順序の逆、 即ち、 第 5ポジシ ヨンから第 1 8図 (第 4ポジション) 、 第 1図 (第 3ポジション) 、 第 1 6図 (第 2ポジション) を経て第 1 4図 (第 1ポジション) に示すよ うに移動する。  Conversely, when moving in the direction B, the order described above is reversed, that is, from the fifth position to the positions shown in FIGS. 18 (4th position), 1 (3rd position), and 16 (2nd position). Position) and move as shown in Fig. 14 (1st position).
なお、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0は、 移動体の電源を 0 F F した際、 どの位置に設定されていても第 1ポジションとしての第 1 4図 に示す初期位置に自動的に設定され移動するようになっている。  The center unit console 200 is automatically set to the initial position shown in Fig. 14 as the first position, regardless of the position set when the power of the moving object is turned off to 0 FF. It is supposed to.
また、 第 1 1図に示す 1 1 0 3は、 設定値選択手段から出力された第 5図に示す記憶手段 1 1 0 2から選択した移動設定値、 表示手段突出設 定値としての表示部設定値及び操作手段突出設定値としての操作部設 定値に基づき、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0を移動設定値に応じ た移動を行い、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から 突出させるか筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる移動制御手段であり、 1 1 0 4は移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が出力した制御信号に基づき、 センタ一コン ソールュニット 2 0 0を第 1図に示す A方向または B方向に移動させ、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0とを筐体部 2 1 0の上面に突出させたり 筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる移動手段であり、 この移動手段 1 1 0 4は 車輪部 2 0 1、 この車輪部 2 0 1の外周面に形成された嚙合部 2 0 2、 車輪部 2 0 1に内蔵され駆動部 (図示せず) 、 レール部 1 1 0、 このレ —ル部 1 1 0の溝内に形成された係止部 1 1 1、 並びに、 表示部 2 2 0 の駆動機構及び操作部 2 3 0の駆動機構とで構成されている。 Also, 1103 shown in FIG. 11 is a movement set value selected from the storage means 1102 shown in FIG. 5 outputted from the set value selection means, and a display section setting as a display means protrusion set value. The center console unit 200 is moved according to the movement set value based on the operation unit setting value as the operation value and the operation means protrusion setting value, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are moved to the housing unit 2. Movement control means protruding from the upper surface of the housing 10 or housed in the housing portion 210, and 1104 is a center-to-console unit 20 based on the control signal output by the movement control means 110. 0 in the direction A or B shown in Fig. 1 so that the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, or are stored in the housing unit 210. This moving means 111 is a wheel part 201, a joint part 202 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the wheel part 201, A drive unit (not shown) built into the wheel unit 201, a rail unit 110, a locking unit 111 formed in the groove of the rail unit 110, and a display unit 22 0 drive mechanism and the drive mechanism of the operation unit 230.
次に、 本実施の形態 1の移動体用機器配設装置の動作を示すフローチ ヤートを第 1 3図に示し、 この第 1 3図を用いて本装置の動作について 説明する。  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the operation of the mobile device installation device of the first embodiment, and the operation of this device will be described with reference to FIG.
まず、 移動体の電源が投入されると操作待受状態となり (ステップ 1 3 0 0 ) 動作が開始される。 このステップ 1 3 0 0の際、 設定値選択手 段 1 1 0 1が第 1図に示す A方向への操作、 即ち、 センターコンソール ユニット 2 0 0の操作部 2 4 1を押圧操作されたか否かを判断し (ステ ップ 1 3 0 1 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 0 1で操作部 2 4 1の操作があった と判断した場合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が操作部 2 4 1の押圧操作 が所定時間内 (例えば 2秒以内) に何回あつたかを判断し (ステップ 1 3 0 2 ) 、 筐体内に設けられ、 現在、 センタ一コンソールユニット 2 0 0の設定されているポジションを常時更新記憶しておく記憶部 (図示せ ず) の記憶内容を設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が抽出する (ステップ 1 3 0 3 ) 。  First, when the power of the mobile body is turned on, the operation standby state is set (step 1300), and the operation is started. At the time of this step 1300, whether the set value selecting means 1101 has been operated in the direction A shown in FIG. 1, that is, whether or not the operation section 2241 of the center console unit 200 has been pressed. (Step 1301), and if it is determined in this step 1301 that the operation unit 2 41 has been operated, the setting value selection means 1 101 It is determined how many times the pressing operation (1) has been performed within a predetermined time (for example, within 2 seconds) (step 1302), and it is provided in the housing and the center-to-console unit 200 is currently set. The set value selecting means 1101 extracts the contents stored in a storage unit (not shown) for constantly updating and storing the position (step 1303).
次に、 ステップ 1 3 0 2の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1力 S 1ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 0 4 ) 、 このステツ プ 1 3 0 4で 1ポジションの移動と判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 0 3の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 1 ポジションを加算したポジションに対応するセンターコンソールュニ ット 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の 上面から突出させるか否かの表示部設定値とを、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの操作部設定値とを選択して移動 制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ Γ 3 0 5 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 0 5の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出 力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作 制御信号を出力してセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0を移動させる とともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を突出させる設定値であれば突 出させ、 筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる設定値であれば筐体部 2 1 0内に 収納する (ステップ 1 3 0 6 ) 。 このステップ 1 3 0 6の動作後、 ステ ップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 2 4 1、 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ス テツプ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。' Next, based on the contents of step 1302, it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 force S1 position has been moved (step 1304). If it is determined that the position has been moved, the setting value selecting means 1101 sets the center console unit 2 corresponding to the position obtained by adding one position to the current position based on the contents of step 1303. The moving direction and the moving distance of 0, and the setting value of the display unit to determine whether or not the display unit 220 projects from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 to the housing unit 210 Of the operation unit to determine whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of the robot, and output it to the movement control means 1103 (step Γ305), and this step 130 After the processing of step 5, the movement control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 111, and outputs an operation control signal to the movement means 110104 so as to perform a predetermined movement operation. To move the center console unit 200, and if it is a setting value that causes the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 to protrude, set it out and store it in the housing unit 210. If so, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1306). After the operation of step 1306, the operation returns to step 1301, the operation units 241, 2442 enter an operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 1301 is as described above. It will be the same. '
また、 ステップ 1 3 0 4で 1ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 2ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 0 7 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 0 7で 2ポジションの移動と 判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 0 3の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 2ポジションを加算したポジションに 対応するセンターコンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離 と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部 設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの 操作部設定値とを選択して移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 0 8 ) 、 このステ.ップ 1 3 0 8の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設 定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう 移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作制御信号を出力してセンタ一コンソ一 ルュニット 2 0 0を移動させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0 を突出させる (ステップ 1 3 0 9 ) 。 このステップ 1 3 0 9の動作後、 ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、操作部 2 4 1 , 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。  If it is not determined in step 13304 that the movement is one position, it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 is a movement of two positions (step 1307). If it is determined in step 1307 that the movement is two positions, the setting value selection means 1101, based on the contents of step 133, sets the center corresponding to the position obtained by adding two positions to the current position. The moving direction and moving distance of the console unit 200, the display unit setting value indicating whether or not the display unit 220 protrudes from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 by the housing The operation unit setting value for whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of the unit 210 is selected and output to the movement control means 1103 (step 13008). After the processing, the movement control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1101, and performs a predetermined movement operation. (2) Output an operation control signal to the moving means 111 to move the center console unit 200 and make the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 protrude. ). After the operation of step 1309, the process returns to step 1301, and the operation units 241, 242 become ready for operation, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above. .
また、 ステップ 1 3 0 7で 2ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 3ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 1 0 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 1 0で 3ポジションの移動と 判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 0 3の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 3ポジションを加算したポジションに 対応するセンタ一コンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離 と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部 設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの 操作部設定値とを選択して移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 1 1 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 1 1の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設 定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう 移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作制御信号を出力してセンターコンソ一 ルュニット 2 0 0を移動させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0 を突出させる (ステップ 1 3 1 2 ) 。 このステップ 1 3 1 2の動作後、 ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、操作部 2 4 1 , 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。 If it is not determined in Step 13 07 that the movement is for two positions, it is determined whether or not the set value selecting means 1101 is for movement for three positions. (Step 1310) If this step 1310 determines that three positions have been moved, the setting value selection means 1101 changes to the current position based on the contents of step 1303. The moving direction and moving distance of the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding the three positions, and the display unit setting value indicating whether or not the display unit 220 is to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210. The operation section setting value for determining whether or not the operation section 230 is projected from the upper surface of the housing section 210 is selected and output to the movement control means 1103 (step 1311). After the processing of step 1 3 1 1, the movement control means 1 103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 101 and controls the movement of the movement means 1 104 so as to perform a predetermined movement operation. A signal is output to move the center console unit 200, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 2 3 Protrude 0 (step 1 3 1 2). After the operation of step 1312, the process returns to step 1301, and the operation section 2411 and 2442 are in an operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above. .
また、 ステップ 1 3 0 3で 3ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 4ポジションの移動と判断し、 ステツ プ 1 3 0 3の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジシ ヨンに 4ポジションを加算したポジションに対応するセンターコンソ ールュニッ卜 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を 筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの操作部設定値とを選択し て移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 1 3 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 3の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1か らの出力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう移動手段 1 1 0 4に対し て動作制御信号を出力してセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0を移動 させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を突出させる (ステップ 1 3 1 4 )。 このステップ 1 3 1 4の動作後、ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 2 4 1 、 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の 動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。 If it is not determined in step 13 03 that the movement is 3 positions, the setting value selection means 1 101 determines that the movement is 4 positions, and the setting is made based on the contents of step 13 03. The value selecting means 1101 moves the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding four positions to the current position, the moving direction and the moving distance, and the display unit 220 is a housing unit 210. Display unit setting value to determine whether to protrude from the upper surface of the housing and operation unit setting value to determine whether to protrude the operating unit 230 from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and perform movement control means 1 1 0 3 (Step 13 13), and after the processing of Step 13 3, the movement control means 1 103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 101 and performs the predetermined movement operation. Move the center console unit 200 by outputting an operation control signal to the moving means 1 104 to perform And make the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 protrude (Step 1 3 1 4). After the operation of step 1 3 14, the process returns to step 1 3 0 1, and the operation units 2 4 1 and 2 4 2 are in the operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 13 0 1 is the same as described above. .
一方、 ステップ 1 3 0 1で設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が第 1図に示す B 方向への操作、 即ち、 センタ一コンソールユニッ ト 2 0 0の操作部 2 4 2を押圧操作されたか否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 1 5 ) 、 このステツ プ 1 3 1 5で操作部 2 4 2の操作があつたと判断した場合は、 設定値選 択手段 1 1 0 1が操作部 2 4 2の押圧操作が所定時間内 (例えば 2秒以 内) に何回あつたかを判断し (ステップ 1 3 1 6 ) 、筐体内に設けられ、 現在、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0の設定されているポジション を常時更新記憶しておく記憶部 (設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1の内部に設け られており、 この記憶部と比較参照して移動設定値等を決定する) の記 憶内容を設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が抽出する (ステップ 1 3 1 7 ) 。 次に、 ステップ 1 3 1 7の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 1ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 1 8 ) 、 このステツ プ 1 3 1 8で 1ポジションの移動と判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 1 7の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 1 ポジションを引算したポジションに対応するセンタ一コンソールュニ ット 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の 上面から突出させるか否かの表示部設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの操作部設定値とを選択して移動制 御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 1 9 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 1 9 の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出力 を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作制 御信号を出力してセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0を移動させると ともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を突出させる設定値であれば突出 させ、 筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる設定値であれば筐体部 2 1 0内に収 納する (ステップ 1 3 2 0 ) 。 このステップ 1 3 2 0の動作後、 ステツ プ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 2 4 1、 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステ ップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。 On the other hand, in step 1301, the set value selection means 1 101 operates in the direction B shown in FIG. 1, that is, whether the operation section 242 of the center-to-console unit 200 is pressed. (Steps 1315), and if it is determined in this step 1315 that the operation of the operation section 242 has been performed, the setting value selection means 1101 is operated by the operation section 242. It is determined how many times the pressing operation has been performed within a predetermined period of time (for example, within 2 seconds) (step 1316), and it is installed in the housing and is currently set in the center unit console 200. Set the storage contents of the storage unit (provided inside the set value selection means 1101, which determines the movement set value etc. by comparing with this storage unit) that constantly updates and stores the current position. The value selection means 1 101 extracts (step 13 17). Next, based on the contents of step 1317, it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 moves by one position (step 1318), and in this step 1318, one position is determined. If it is determined that the position has moved, the set value selecting means 1101 sets the center console unit 20 corresponding to the position obtained by subtracting one position from the current position based on the contents of steps 1317. 0 moving direction and moving distance, display unit setting values indicating whether or not the display unit 220 protrudes from the top surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 on the top surface of the housing unit 210. From the operation unit to determine whether to protrude from the control unit and output it to the movement control means 1103 (step 1319) (step 1319). After the processing of step 1319, the movement control means 11 0 3 receives the output from the set value selecting means 1 1 0 1, and controls the moving means 1 1 0 4 to perform a predetermined moving operation. Control signal is output to move center console unit 200 and display unit 220 and operation unit 230 are set if they are set to protrude. If the set value is to be stored in the housing section 210, it is stored in the housing section 210 (step 1320). After the operation of step 1320, the operation returns to step 1301, and the operation units 241 and 2442 are in an operation standby state. The operation processing after step 1301 is as described above. It will be the same.
また、 ステップ 1 3 1 8で 1ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 2ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 2 1 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 2 1で 2ポジションの移動と 判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 1 7の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 2ポジションを加算したポジションに 対応するセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離 と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部 設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの 操作部設定値とを選択して移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 If it is not determined in step 1318 that the movement is one position, it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 is a movement of two positions (step 1312). If it is determined that the position is moved by 2 positions in 1 3 2 1, based on the contents of step 13 17, the setting value selection unit 1 1 0 1 sets the center corresponding to the position obtained by adding 2 positions to the current position. The moving direction and moving distance of the console unit 200, the display value for determining whether or not the display unit 220 projects from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 for the housing Operation unit setting value for whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of the unit 210 and output it to the movement control means 1103 (Step 1
3 2 2 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 2 2の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設 定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出力を受けて、'所定の移動動作を行うよう 移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作制御信号を出力してセンターコンソ一 ルュニット 2 0 0を移動させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0 を突出させる設定値であれば突出させ、 筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる設 定値であれば筐体部 2 1 0内に収納する (ステップ 1 3 2 3 ) 。 このス テツプ 1 3 2 3の動作後、 ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 2 4 1 、 23 2 2) After the processing in step 1 32 2, the movement control means 1 103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 101 and performs a predetermined movement operation. A motion control signal is output to the control unit 04 to move the center console unit 200 and, if the set value causes the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 to protrude, the unit is protruded. If the set value is to be stored in 10, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1332). After the operation of step 1 3 2 3, return to step 1
4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説 明と同様になる。 The operation standby state of 42 is entered, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above.
また、 ステップ 1 3 2 1で 2ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 3ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 2 4 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 2 4で 3ポジションの移動と 判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 1 7の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 3ポジションを加算したポジションに 対応するセンターコンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離 と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部 設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの 操作部設定値とを選択して移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1If it is not determined in step 1 3 2 1 that the movement is 2 positions, it is determined whether or not the setting value selection means 1 101 is a 3 position movement (step 1 3 2 4). If it is determined that the position has been moved by 3 positions in 1 3 2 4, the setting value selection 1101 is the moving direction and distance of the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding 3 positions to the current position, and the display section 220 is viewed from the top of the housing section 210. A display unit setting value indicating whether or not to protrude and an operation unit setting value indicating whether or not the operation unit 230 is to be protruded from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 are selected and provided to the movement control unit 1103. Output (Step 1
3 2 5 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 2 5の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設 定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう 移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作制御信号を出力してセンターコンソ一 ルュニット 2 0 0を移動させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0 を突出させる設定値であれば突出させ、 筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる設 定値であれば筐体部 2 1 0内に収納する (ステップ 1 3 2 6 ) 。 このス テツプ 1 3 2 6の動作後、 ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 2 4 1、 23 2 5) After the processing of step 1 3 2 5, the movement control means 1 1 0 3 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 1 0 1 and performs a predetermined movement operation. The operation control signal is output to 4 and the center console unit 200 is moved, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded if they are set to protrude. If the set value is to be stored in 0, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1326). After the operation of step 1 3 2 6, return to step 1
4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説 明と同様になる。 The operation standby state of 42 is entered, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above.
また、 ステップ 1 3 2 4で 3ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 4ポジションの移動と判断し、 ステツ プ 1 3 1 7の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジシ ョンに 4ポジションを加算したポジションに対応するセン夕一コンソ ールュニット 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を 筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの操作部設定値とを選択し て移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 2 7 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 2 7の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1か らの出力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう移動手段 1 1 0 4に対し て動作制御信号を出力してセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0を移動 させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を収納させる (ステップ 1 328)。このステップ 1 328の動作後、ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 24 1 , 242の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 30 1以降の 動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。 Also, if it is not determined in step 1324 that the movement is 3 positions, the setting value selection means 1 101 determines that the movement is 4 positions, and the setting is performed based on the contents of step 1317. The value selection means 1 101 sets the moving direction and moving distance of the send / receive console 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding 4 positions to the current position, and the display unit 220 serves as the housing unit 2. Movement control means by selecting a display unit setting value as to whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of 10 and an operation unit setting value as to whether or not the operation unit 230 is to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 Output to 1103 (step 1327), and after the processing of step 1327, the movement control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 110101 and A movement control signal is output to the moving means 1104 to move the center console unit 200 so that the center console unit 200 moves. And store the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 (step 1 328). After the operation in step 1328, the process returns to step 1301, and the operation units 24 1 and 242 are in an operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as that described above.
なお、 ステップ 1 3 1 5で設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が操作部 422の 操作は行われていないと判新した際は、 ステップ 1 30 1に戻り、 操作 部 241、 242の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作 処理は上記説明と同様になる。  If the setting value selecting unit 1101 determines that the operation unit 422 has not been operated in step 1315, the process returns to step 1301, and the operation unit 241 and 242 wait for operation. In this state, the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above.
次に、 本実施の形態 1では、 移動体用機器配設装置に加えて、 撮像手 段としてのカメラ 1 08、 2 50を用いた移動体用情報処理装置を備え ており、 以下、 この移動体用情報処理装置について第 1図、 第 2図、 第 1 9図〜第 2 1図を用いて説明する。  Next, in the first embodiment, in addition to the mobile device arrangement device, a mobile information processing device using cameras 108 and 250 as imaging means is provided. The body information processing apparatus will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, and 19 to 21.
第 19図は、 カメラ 1 08、 2 50を用いた移動体用情報処理装置の 概略構成を示した概略構成図、 第 20図は、 第 1 9図の要部としての力 メラにて撮影対象となる撮影対象物を示す説明図、 第 20図は第 1 8図 の移動体用情報処理装置の動作の流れを示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 19 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile information processing device using cameras 108 and 250, and FIG. 20 is a photographing target using a power camera as a main part of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an operation flow of the information processing apparatus for a mobile object shown in FIG. 18.
1 08はインストウルメン卜パネル 1 0 2に設けられた撮像手段と してのカメラであり、 250はセンターコンソールュニット 0 0の前 面部に設けられた撮像手段としてのカメラである。  Reference numeral 108 denotes a camera provided as an imaging means provided on the instrument panel 102, and reference numeral 250 denotes a camera provided as an imaging means provided on the front surface of the center console unit 100.
これらカメラ 1 08、 2 50は、 同じ機能を有しており、 カメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0の前部に撮影対象物を翳して可視情報を撮影するものであり、 この撮影対象物とは、 例えば、 物を購入した際にその店から発行される レシ一卜や、新聞の折り込みチラシ、観光ガイドブック等の内容である。 これら情報源をカメラ 1 08、 25 0で取り込み、 ィンストウルメン トパネル 1 0 2に設けられた表示部 1 0 6やセンタ一コンソールュニ ッ卜 20 0に設けられた表示部 22 0に表示されるようになっている。  These cameras 108 and 250 have the same function, and hold the object to be photographed in front of the cameras 108 and 250 to photograph visible information. For example, the contents are the contents issued from the store when the product is purchased, the insert of the newspaper, the tourist guidebook, and the like. These information sources are captured by the cameras 108 and 250, and displayed on the display unit 106 provided on the instrument panel 102 and the display unit 220 provided on the center console unit 200. ing.
1 90 1は、 カメラ 1 0 8、 2 50で撮影され、 出力された可視情報 と後述する記憶手段に記憶されたカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0で撮影された可 視情報を解析するための可視情報が示された辞書情報とを比較して解 析する解析手段、 1 9 0 2は解析手段 1 9 0 1がカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0 で撮影した可視情報の内容を解析する際に比較対象とする可視情報と しての辞書情報を記憶した記憶手段であり、 この記憶手段 1 9 0 2には, 図形や記号、 アルファベットやひらがな、 かたかな、 漢字、 数字等の文 字を認識する上で必要な辞書情報を記憶している。 また、 1 9 0 3は解 析手段 1 9 0 1の解析結果を表示手段 1 0 6、 2 2 0に対して出力し、 表示させるよう制御する表示制御手段であり、 移動体用情報処理装置は これらから構成されている。 1 90 1 is the visible information that was taken with the camera 108 and 250 and output Analyzing means for comparing and analyzing dictionary information indicating visible information for analyzing the visible information captured by the cameras 108 and 250 stored in the storage means described later, 19 Numeral 0 2 is storage means for storing dictionary information as visible information to be compared when the analyzing means 1901 analyzes the contents of the visible information captured by the cameras 108 and 250. This storage means 1902 stores dictionary information necessary for recognizing characters such as figures, symbols, alphabets, hiragana, katakana, kanji, and numbers. Reference numeral 1903 denotes display control means for outputting the analysis result of the analysis means 1901 to the display means 106 and 220, and controlling the display so as to display the information. Is composed of these.
第 2 0図は、 店で発行されるレシートの表示例であり、 2 0 0 1は店 名、 2 0 0 2はその店の所在地 (住所) 、 2 0 0 3は購入日、 2 0 0 4 は支払い対象の品名、 2 0 0 5は支払いの内訳である。  FIG. 20 shows a display example of a receipt issued at a store, where 2001 is the store name, 2002 is the address (address) of the store, 2003 is the purchase date, and 200 4 is the name of the item to be paid, and 2005 is the breakdown of the payment.
この第 2 0図に用いられた各情報 2 0 0 1〜 2 0 0 5をカメラ 1 0 8かカメラ 2 5 0で撮影し、 この撮影した内容が記憶手段 1 9 0 2に記 憶されている辞書情報と比較して解析手段 1 9 0 1が解析、 即ち、 各情 報 2 0 0 1〜 2 0 0 5の文字情報等の認識を行い、 この認識結果 (解析 結果) を表示部 1 0 6か表示部 2 2 0に表示するものである。  Each piece of information 200 1 to 200 5 used in FIG. 20 is photographed by the camera 108 or the camera 250, and the photographed contents are stored in the storage means 1902. The analysis means 1901 performs analysis, that is, recognizes the character information and the like of each piece of information 201 to 205, and displays the recognition result (analysis result) on the display unit 1 0 6 is displayed on the display unit 220.
次に動作について第 2 1図を用いて説明する。 この第 2 1図は、 移動 体用情報処理装置の動作の流れを示すフローチャートである。  Next, the operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation of the mobile information processing apparatus.
まず、 自動車の電源が投入されると装置への撮像操作を待つ受ける待 受状態となり(ステップ 2 1 0 0 )、 動作が開始される。 次にカメラ 1 0 8かカメラ 2 5 0から可視情報を読み取つたか否かを解析手段 1 9 0 1が判断し (ステップ 2 1 0 1 ) 、 このステップ 2 1 0 1で可視情報を 読み取つたと判断した場合は、 解析手段 1 9 0 1が記憶手段 1 9 0 2か らカメラで読み取った可視情報に対応した情報がどの情報に該当する のか選別して抽出し、 解析を行う (ステップ 2 1 0 2 ) 。 First, when the power of the automobile is turned on, the apparatus enters a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation on the apparatus (step 210), and the operation is started. Next, the analyzing means 1901 determines whether or not the visible information has been read from the camera 108 or the camera 250 (step 2101), and the visible information is read in this step 201. If it is determined that the information corresponding to the visible information read by the camera from the storage means 190 It is then selected and extracted and analyzed (step 210).
このステップ 2 1 0 2で解析された結果が、 解析手段 1 9 0 1から出 力されたか否か表示制御手段 1 9 0 3が判断し (ステップ 2 1 0 3 ) 、 このステップ 2 1 0 3で解析結果が出力されたと判断した場合は、 この 結果を表示部 1 0 6か表示部 2 2 0に表示する (ステップ 2 1 0 4 ) 。  The display control means 1903 determines whether or not the result analyzed in step 2102 has been output from the analysis means 1901 (step 2103). If it is determined that the analysis result has been output in step, the result is displayed on the display unit 106 or the display unit 220 (step 210).
このステップ 2 1 0 4の処理が完了後、 再度ステップ 2 1 0 1に戻り, 撮像操作を待つ受ける待受状態となり、 ステップ 2 1 0 1以下、 上記と 同様の処理が行われる。  After the processing of step 210 is completed, the process returns to step 211 again to be in a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation, and the same processing as described above is performed after step 210.
なお、 解析手段 1 9 0 1がステップ 2 1 0 1で可視情報を読み取って いないと判断した場合は、 再度、 ステップ 2 1 0 1に戻り、 撮像操作を 待つ受ける待受状態となり、 ステップ 2 1 0 1以下、 上記と同様の処理 が行われる。  If the analyzing means 1901 determines that the visible information has not been read in step 2101, it returns to step 2101 again, and enters a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation. 01 and below, the same processing as above is performed.
また、 ステップ 2 1 0 3で解析結果が出力されないと判断した塲合は. 再度ステップ 2 1 0 3に戻り、 解析結果が出力されるまで待受状態とな る。  If it is determined in step 210 that the analysis result is not output, the process returns to step 210 again to be in a standby state until the analysis result is output.
従って、 上記のように、 自動車 1 0 0の運転席 1 2 1と助手席 1 2 2 との間に挟まれる位置に設けられ、 C Dプレーヤやカセットテーププレ ーャ、 D V Dプレーヤ等を配設可能にした配設手段に、 これら装置への 操作を行う操作部と、 これら装置の可視情報を映像として表示する表示 手段とを収納可能で且つ突出可能に構成されたセンタ一コンソールュ ニット 2 0 0をレール部 1 1 0に沿って移動可能にし、 各座席それぞれ に対応したセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0の移動設定値、 表示部 2 2 0の突出設定値、 及び操作部 2 3 0の突出設定値を予め記憶しておき、 操作内容によって適正にセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0を使用で きるよう構成したことにより、 どの席の着座者においても、 音響機器や 映像再生機器への適切な位置での操作が可能となり、 操作に基づき、 セ ンタ一コンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0を各座席の着座者に対応した位置ま で自動的に移動されるので、 使用者自らがセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0の位置を微調整しながら決めなくても、 自動的に最適な位置に設 定されるため、 設定操作の煩わしさが解消され、 使用者の利便性が向上 する。 即ち、 操作部への操作のみで自動的に表示部 2 2 0や操作部 2 3 0を上方へ突出させたり、 収納させることができるので、 このような煩 わしい動作を解消でき、 使用者の利便性が向上するものである。 Therefore, as described above, it is provided at a position sandwiched between the driver's seat 121 and the passenger seat 122 of the automobile 100, and a CD player, a cassette tape player, a DVD player, and the like can be provided. The operating unit for operating these devices and the display means for displaying the visual information of these devices as images can be housed in the arranged arrangement means, and the center console unit 200 which can be protruded is railed. It is possible to move along the section 110, and set the movement setting value of the center console unit 200, the projection setting value of the display section 220, and the projection setting value of the operation section 230 corresponding to each seat. The center console unit 200 can be used properly according to the operation contents, so that any occupant in any seat can access the audio equipment and video playback equipment at the appropriate position. Operable Will, on the basis of the operation, Se The center console unit 200 is automatically moved to the position corresponding to the occupant of each seat, so that the user does not have to decide the position of the center console unit 200 while making fine adjustments. Since the position is automatically set to the optimum position, the trouble of the setting operation is eliminated, and the convenience for the user is improved. That is, the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 can be automatically protruded upward or stored by only operating the operation unit, so that such a troublesome operation can be eliminated. The convenience of the system is improved.
また、 店が発行したレシ一ト等の可視情報を自動車内に設置された力 メラで読み取り、 この解析結果を自動車内に設けられた表示部に表示で きるので、 使用者の利便性が向上する。 実施の形態 2 .  In addition, visible information such as receipts issued by stores can be read by a camera installed in the car, and the results of this analysis can be displayed on a display unit installed in the car, improving user convenience. I do. Embodiment 2
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 2に係る移動体用機器配設装置につい て説明する。 なお、 この実施の形態 2では移動体用表示装置を用いた移 動体用機器配設装置としている。  Next, a mobile device arrangement device according to another embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described. In the second embodiment, a mobile device installation device using a mobile display device is used.
上記した実施の形態 1では、 レール部 1 1 0とセンタ一コンソールュ ニット 2 0 0とは、 自動車内の床部 (フロア部) に設けるように説明し たが、 これらレール部 1 1 0とセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0とを 自動車内の天井部に設けても良い。  In the first embodiment described above, the rail section 110 and the center console unit 200 are described as being provided on the floor (floor section) in the automobile. The console unit 200 may be provided on the ceiling in the automobile.
第 2 2図は、 実施の形態 2の移動体用表示装置を用いた移動体用機器 配設装置の概略構成を示す概略構成図であり、 1 2 1は運転席、 1 2 2 は助手席、 1 3 1は運転席の後ろに位置する右側中間席、 1 3 2は助手 席の後ろに位置し、 右側中間席の左側に位置する左側中間席である。 また、 2 2 0 0は自動車室内の天井部であり、 この天井部 2 2 0 0に は、 第 1表示手段としてのルームミラー 2 2 1 0と、 右側に配置された 座席 1 2 1、 1 3 1と左側に配置された座席 1 2 2、 1 3 2との間に位 置する箇所で、 自動車の前後方向に設けられた案内手段としてのレール 部 2 2 2 0と、 このレール部 2 2 2 0によって案内され、 第 1図と同様 に A方向または B方向に移動可能で、 複数の音響機器や映像再生機器を 収納したセンターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0とが設けられている。 ルームミラー 2 2 1 0は、 運転席 1 2 1前方の天井面に設けられ、 自 動車の後方や車室内の状況を表示する機能を有しており、 外観は、 第 2 3図に示すとおりである。 このルームミラー 2 2 1 0の後方視界は破線 で示している。 FIG. 22 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device disposition device using the mobile device display device according to the second embodiment, wherein 1 2 1 is a driver's seat, and 1 2 2 is a passenger seat. 131, a right middle seat located behind the driver's seat, and 132 a left middle seat located behind the passenger seat and to the left of the right middle seat. Reference numeral 2200 denotes a ceiling in the interior of the car, and the ceiling 2200 has a room mirror 2 210 as a first display means and seats 1 2 1 and 1 disposed on the right side. 3 1 and seats 1 2 2 and 1 3 2 located on the left side At the place where the vehicle is to be placed, a rail section 2202 is provided as a guide means provided in the front-rear direction of the vehicle, and is guided by the rail section 220, and can move in the A direction or the B direction as in FIG. In addition, a center console unit 230 accommodating a plurality of audio devices and video reproduction devices is provided. The rearview mirror 222 is provided on the ceiling in front of the driver's seat 121, and has a function to display the situation behind the vehicle and the interior of the vehicle. The exterior is as shown in Fig. 23. It is. The rear field of view of the room mirror 2 210 is indicated by a broken line.
レール部 2 2 2 0は、 溝部が形成され、 この溝部の開口部は溝部より 長さが短く形成されており、 後述するセンターコンソールユニット 2 2 3 0をレール部 2 2 2 0に取り付けた際、 溝部の開口部の裏面にてセン 夕一コンソールュニッ卜 2 2 3 0の車輪部を保持するため、 セン夕一コ ンソールュニッ卜 2 2 3 0が落下しないようになっている。  The rail portion 222 has a groove formed therein, and the opening of the groove portion is formed to be shorter than the groove portion. When a center console unit 222 described later is mounted on the rail portion 222, In order to hold the wheel of the console unit 230 on the back of the opening of the groove, the console unit 230 is prevented from dropping.
また、 レール部 2 2 2 0の溝部開口部の裏面には、 センターコンソ一 ルュニッ ト 2 2 3 0の車輪部に形成された嚙合部と係止する係止部が 形成されており、 車輪部に内蔵されている駆動モ一夕により、 駆動モー タを回動動作して車輪部を回動動作させて A方向または B方向にセン 夕一コンソールュニッ卜 2 2 3 0を移動するようになっている。  Further, on the back surface of the groove opening of the rail portion 222, a locking portion for locking with a joint formed on the wheel portion of the center console unit 230 is formed. With the drive motor built in the unit, the drive motor is rotated to rotate the wheels, and the sensor console 2 230 is moved in the A direction or the B direction. I have.
このレール部 2 2 2 0とセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 2 3 0との 関係を示す断面図は背景技術で説明した第 5 0図と同様の機構となつ ている。  The cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the rail section 222 and the center console unit 230 has the same mechanism as that of FIG. 50 described in the background art.
次に、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0について説明する。 2 2 3 0はセンターコンソールュニットであり、 センターコンソール ュニッ トの筐体部 2 2 4 0と、 この筐体部 2 2 4 0の一部に開口部が形 成され、 この開口部内に収納可能に設けられ、 使用時には筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1の下方に突出する第 2表示手段としての表示部 2 2 5 0と、 筐体部 2 2 4 0の後面 (第 2 2図では手前側) に設けられた操 作部 2 2 6 0と、 筐体部 2 2 4 0内に配設された音響装置や映像装置に C DゃM DゃD V D等の記憶媒体を揷入する揷入ロ 2 2 7 1と、 センタ —コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0を A方向に移動させる際に操作する操 作部 2 2 7 1と、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0を B方向に移動 させる際に操作する操作部 2 2 7 2とで構成されている。 Next, the center-unit console 230 will be described. Reference numeral 2230 denotes a center console unit. An opening is formed in the housing 2240 of the center console unit, and an opening is formed in a part of the housing 2240, and is housed in the opening. A display section as a second display means that protrudes below the lower surface of the housing section during use. 50, an operation unit 2260 provided on the rear surface (front side in FIG. 22) of the housing 2240, and an audio device provided in the housing 2240. 2 2 7 1 for inserting a storage medium such as a CD / MD / DVD into a computer or video device, and an operation unit 2 2 for operating the center unit 2 230 in the A direction 7 1 and an operation unit 2 2 7 2 for operating the center-to-console unit 2 230 in the B direction.
また、 2 2 8 0はセン夕一コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0の下面に設け られ、 自動車後方や周辺、 及び車室内の映像を撮影する撮像手段として のカメラであり、 自動車の前後方向や左右方向を撮影可能にするよう 3 6 0 ° 方向に回動可能に構成されている。 このカメラ 2 2 8 0は、通常、 自動車後方が撮影可能な位置で保持されている。  Reference numeral 2280 denotes a camera provided on the lower surface of the console unit 230 and serves as an image pickup means for capturing images of the rear and surroundings of the vehicle and the interior of the vehicle. It is configured to be rotatable in the 360 ° direction so that the direction can be photographed. The camera 2280 is normally held at a position where the rear of the car can be photographed.
また、 筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1には複数の開口部 2 2 4 2が形 成されており、 これら複数の開口部 2 2 4 2には I Cカードのようなメ モリカードがそれぞれ揷入できる挿入口となっており、 本実施の形態で は 5枚のメモリカードが挿入可能となっている。  Also, a plurality of openings 2 242 are formed in the lower surface 224 of the housing 224, and a memory such as an IC card is formed in the plurality of openings 224. Each of the cards has an insertion slot into which a card can be inserted. In the present embodiment, five memory cards can be inserted.
なお、 表示部 2 2 5 0を筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1から突出させ たり筐体部 2 2 4 0内に収納させたりする駆動機構は、 実施の形態 1で 説明した第 4図〜第 6図に示す駆動機構と同様の構成物が筐体部 2 2 4 0内に設けられている。  Note that the driving mechanism for projecting the display portion 222 from the lower surface 222 of the housing portion 222 and for storing it in the housing portion 222 has been described in Embodiment 1. The same components as those of the drive mechanism shown in FIGS. 4 to 6 are provided in the housing 222.
また、 表示部 2 2 5 0は筐体部 2 2 4 0がレール部 2 2 2 0のどこの 位置に位置しているかにより、 C方向に移動して筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 から表示部 2 2 5 0が突出されたり、 D方向に移動して筐体部 2 2 4 0 の中に収納されるように構成されている。  In addition, the display unit 222 moves in the C direction from the lower surface of the housing 220, depending on where the housing 220 is located on the rail 220. The display section 222 is configured to protrude or move in the direction D to be housed in the housing section 240.
また、 センターコンソールュニッ卜 2 2 3 0を使用していない際は、 第 2 8図に示すように自動車内の最前方まで移動されるようになって いる (センタ一コンソールユニット 2 2 3 0の初期位置) 。 ここで、 実施の形態 1で説明した第 1図との相違点としては、 センタ 一コンソールュニッ ト 2 2 3 0の上下の向きが逆になつているととも に、 操作部 2 2 6 0がセン夕一コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0の側面前面 部に設けられており、 実施の形態 1で説明したように筐体部 2 2 4 0内 に収納可能には構成されておらず、 また、 筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1に3 6 0 ° 回動可能なカメラが設けられている。 When the center console unit 230 is not used, it is moved to the forefront in the car as shown in Fig. 28 (center console unit 230). Initial position). Here, the difference from FIG. 1 described in the first embodiment is that the center unit console unit 230 is upside down, and the operation unit 222 is It is provided on the front side of the console unit 222 and is not configured to be housed in the housing 222 as described in the first embodiment. A camera capable of rotating 360 ° is provided on the lower surface 222 of the body portion 222.
次に、 ルームミラ一 2 2 1 ひの表示について第 2 3図〜第 2 5図を用 いて説明する。 ルームミラー 2 2 1 0の構成としては、 背景技術で説明 した第 5 1図、 第 5 2図で説明した構成と同様となっている。  Next, the display of the room mirror 221 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. The configuration of the room mirror 222 is the same as the configuration described in FIGS. 51 and 52 described in the background art.
ルームミラ一 2 2 1 0は通常、ミラー(鏡)面 2 2 1 2となっており、 このミラー面 2 2 1 2の全面にて後方映像が写し出されている。 この時, ルームミラー 2 2 1 0内部に設けられた液晶部 (図示せず) が指令に基 づき、 導通状態になると、 第 2 4図に示すとおり、 ミラー面 2 2 1 2の 一部に液晶部の表示部 2 2 1 3が表示され、 実際に、 カメラ 2 2 8 0に て撮影された後方映像を表示すると第 2 5図に示すとおりになる。  The room mirror 2 2 10 usually has a mirror (mirror) surface 2 2 12, and the rear image is projected on the entire surface of the mirror surface 2 2 1 2. At this time, when the liquid crystal unit (not shown) provided inside the rearview mirror 2201 becomes conductive according to the command, as shown in Fig. 24, a part of the mirror surface 2221 The display section 2 2 13 of the liquid crystal section is displayed, and the rear image actually shot by the camera 2280 is displayed as shown in FIG.
なお、 2 2 1 1はルームミラ一 2 2 1 0を自動車 1 0 0の天井部 2 2 0 0に取り付けられる支持部である。 なお、 この支持部 2 2 1 1は、 天 井部 2 2 0 0に取り付けるのではなく、'フロントガラス 1 0 1の中央部 上方に取り付けるようにしてもよい。  Reference numeral 2 211 denotes a support unit for attaching the room mirror 222 to the ceiling 220 of the automobile 100. Note that the support portion 2 211 may be attached to the upper part of the windshield 101, instead of being attached to the ceiling portion 220.
次に、 第 2 6図、 第 2 7図を用いて本実施の形態 2の動作制御を行な う主要部の構成、 及び動作の流れについて説明する。  Next, the configuration of the main part for performing the operation control of the second embodiment and the flow of the operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.
図において、 2 2 5 0は第 2表示手段としてのセンターコンソールュ ニット 2 2 3 0に突出/収納可能に形成された表示部、 2 6 0 1は表示 部 2 2 5 0が突出しているか否か、 即ち表示部 2 2 5 0の収納状態を実 施の形態 1で説明した第 1 1図に示す設定値選択手段が選択した表示 部設定値に基づき判断する収納状態判断手段、 2 2 6 2は収納状態判断 手段 2 2 6 1が判断した結果に基づき、 後述する撮像手段 2 2 8 0と第 1表示手段 2 2 1 0に動作指令を出力する表示制御手段であり、 この表 示制御手段 2 6 0 2は表示部 2 2 5 0が筐体部 2 2 4 0内に収納され ていると収納状態判断手段が判断した場合は、 撮像手段 2 2 8 0及び第 1表示手段 2 2 1 0に対して動作指令を出力せず、 表示部 2 2 5 0が筐 体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1から下方に突出していると判断した場合 は、 撮像手段 2 2 8 0及び第 1表示手段 2 2 1 0に対して動作指令を出 力するようになっている。 In the figure, reference numeral 2250 denotes a display portion formed so as to be able to protrude / retract from the center console unit 2230 as the second display means, and 2601 denotes whether or not the display portion 250 is protruding. That is, the storage state determination means for determining the storage state of the display section 250 based on the display section set value selected by the set value selection section shown in FIG. 11 described in the first embodiment. 2 is the storage state judgment Based on the result determined by the means 2 261, it is a display control means for outputting an operation command to an imaging means 228 0 and a first display means 222, which will be described later. When the storage state determining means determines that the display section 220 is housed in the housing section 240, the display section 220 and the first display section 222 are determined. If it is determined that the display unit 2250 protrudes downward from the lower surface 2241 of the housing 2240 without outputting an operation command, the imaging unit 2280 and the first display unit are determined. An operation command is output to 2 210.
また、 表示制御手段 2 6 0 2が出力した動作指令に基づき、 撮影動作 を開始し、 撮影した映像を出力する撮像手段としての C C Dカメラ等の カメラ 2 2 8 0、 表示制御手段 2 6 0 2が出力した動作指令に基づき、 導通状態となってカメラ 2 2 8 0から出力される映像を表示するよう 動作する第 1表示手段としてのルームミラ一 2 2 1 0であり、 このルー ムミラーは導通状態になった際、 第 2 3図に示す状態となり、 カメラ 2 2 8 0から映像が出力されると、 第 2 4図に示す状態のように、 この映 像を液晶部の表示部 2 2 1 3に表示する。  Also, based on the operation command output by the display control means 2602, a photographing operation is started, and a camera 280 such as a CCD camera as an imaging means for outputting a captured image, and a display control means 2602 The room mirror 2 210 as the first display means that operates to display an image output from the camera 2 280 based on the operation command output from the camera 2, and the room mirror is in the conductive state. 23, the state shown in FIG. 23 is reached, and when an image is output from the camera 228, this image is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 221, as shown in the state shown in FIG. Display in 3.
なお、 本実施の形態 2ではセンタ一コンソールュニッ卜 2 2 3 0に設 けた表示部 2 2 5 0の収納状態により、 カメラ 2 2 8 0の動作、 及びこ の撮像手段 2 2 8 0が撮影した映像を表示部 2 2 4 0が表示するよう にしていたが、 以下のとおりにしても良く、 第 2 7図にはこれら構成要 素も含めている。  In the second embodiment, the operation of the camera 2280 and the imaging means 2280 take a picture depending on the storage state of the display unit 2250 provided in the center console unit 2230. Although the image was displayed on the display unit 222, it may be as follows, and FIG. 27 includes these components.
即ち、 運転席 1 2 1の近傍に操作手段 2 6 0 3を設け、 この操作手段 2 6 0 3が操作された場合は、 センタ コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0に 設けられた表示部 2 2 5 0が突出されている収納されているかに関わ らず、 カメラ 2 2 8 0及びルームミラー 2 2 1 0に対して動作指令を出 力し、 カメラ 2 2 8 0で撮影された映像をルームミラー 2 2 1 0に設け られた液晶部の表示部に表示するようにしている。 このため、 センター コンソ一ルュニッ ト 2 2 3 0の表示部 2 2 5 0が筐体部 2 2 4 0内に 収納されている際に、 運転者がカメラ 2 2 8 0で撮影された映像をル一 ムミラーに表示して見たい場合等に有用である。 That is, the operating means 2603 is provided near the driver's seat 121, and when the operating means 2603 is operated, the display unit 2205 provided on the center console unit 230 is provided. Regardless of whether or not 0 is protruded and stored, an operation command is output to the camera 2280 and the room mirror 2210, and the image captured by the camera 2280 is output to the room mirror. 2 2 1 0 It is displayed on the display section of the liquid crystal section. For this reason, when the display section 2250 of the center console unit 2230 is stored in the housing section 2240, the driver can view the video taken by the camera 2280. This is useful when you want to display on a room mirror.
また、 カメラ 2 2 8 0は 3 6 0 ° 回動動作可能に構成しており、 使用 者の好みに応じてカメラ 2 2 8 0の撮影方向を変更できるようになつ ている。 即ち、 運転席 1 2 1の近傍にカメラ 2 2 8 0の撮影方向の変更 を行なう撮影方向変更手段 2 6 0 4が設けられており、 カメラ 2 2 8 0 の通常の向きは真後方向であるが、 例えば、 運転者が好きな方向を見た い際に、 簡単に操作することのみで、 カメラ 2 2 8 0の向きが変更でき る。  Further, the camera 2202 is configured to be capable of rotating 360 °, so that the shooting direction of the camera 222 can be changed according to the user's preference. That is, a photographing direction changing means 2604 that changes the photographing direction of the camera 2280 is provided in the vicinity of the driver's seat 1221, and the normal direction of the camera 2280 is the rearward direction. However, for example, when the driver wants to see the desired direction, the direction of the camera 228 can be changed by simply operating the driver.
カメラの撮影方向の変更は、 撮影方向変更手段 2 6 0 4への押圧操作 が継続して行なわれている間、 カメラ 2 2 8 0を回動動作制御するよう にしたり、 撮影方向変更手段 2 6 0 4への 1回の操作につき 2 ° ずつ時 計方向に回転するようにしても良い。  The camera's shooting direction can be changed by controlling the rotation of the camera 2280 while the pressing operation on the shooting direction changing means 2604 is continuously performed, or by changing the shooting direction changing means 2 The rotation in the clockwise direction by 2 ° per one operation on the 604 may be performed.
次に、 第 1 8図を用いて本実施の形態 2の動作の流れについて説明す る。 第 1 8図は、 本実施の形態 2の動作の流れを示すフロ一チャートで ある。  Next, the operation flow of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation of the second embodiment.
まず、 自動車の電源が投入されると装置の動作が開始され(ステップ 2 7 0 0 )、 まず収納状態判断手段 2 6 0 1がセンターコンソールュニ ッ ト 2 2 3 0の筐体部 2 2 4 0内に表示部 2 2 5 0が収納されている か否かを判断し (ステップ 2 7 0 1 ) 、 このステップ 2 7 0 1で表示部 2 2 5 0が筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1から下方に突出していると 収納状態判断手段 2 6 0 1が判断した場合、 表示制御手段 2 6 0 2が力 メラ 2 2 8 0と、 ルームミラー 2 2 1 0内に設けた液晶部の表示部 2 2 1 3とに対し、 導通させてカメラ 2 2 8 0と表示部 2 2 1 3を動作させ (ステップ 2 7 0 2 ) 、 このステップ 2 7 0 2を受けてカメラ 2 2 8 0 が向いている方向の映像を撮影し (ステップ 2 7 0 3 ) 、 このステップ 2 7 0 3にて撮影された映像を液晶の表示部 2 2 1 3にて表示する (ス テツプ 2 7 0 4 ) 。 First, when the power of the automobile is turned on, the operation of the apparatus is started (step 2700), and first, the storage state judging means 2601 is connected to the housing 2 of the center console unit 2230. It is determined whether or not the display unit 2250 is stored in 40 (step 2701), and in this step 2701, the display unit 2250 is replaced with the housing unit 2240. When the storage state determination means 2601 determines that the display protrudes downward from the lower surface 2240 of the camera, the display control means 2602 The camera 2 280 and the display 2 2 13 are operated by turning on the display 2 2 1 3 of the liquid crystal section provided. (Step 2 7 0 2), receiving the step 2 7 0 2, captures an image in the direction that the camera 2 2 8 0 is facing (Step 2 7 0 3), and captures the image in this step 2 7 0 3 The displayed image is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 222 (step 2704).
このステップ 2 7 0 4の処理後、 ステップ 2 7 0 1に戻り、 以下、 上 記と同様の処理を繰り返す。  After the processing in step 274, the process returns to step 2701, and the same processing as described above is repeated.
また、 ステップ 2 7 0 1で収納状態判断手段 2 6 0 1がセンタ一コン ソールュニット 2 2 3 0の筐体部 2 2 4 0内に表示部 2 2 5 0が突出 されていない、 即ち、 収納されていると判断した場合は、 表示制御手段 2 6 0 2がカメラ 2 2 8 0及びルームミラ一 2 2 1 0の液晶部に対し て非導通を継続し、 ルームミラ一 2 2 1 0はミラ一面 2 2 1 1の全面が ミラーの機能とする (ステップ 2 7 0 5 ) 。 このステップ 2 7 0 5の処 理後、 再度ステップ 2 7 0 1に戻り、 処理を繰り返す。  Also, in step 2701, the storage state determining means 2601 does not protrude the display unit 225 into the housing unit 224 of the center console unit 230, that is, the storage state. If it is determined that the display is turned on, the display control means 2602 keeps the liquid crystal portion of the camera 220 and the room mirror 2201 non-conductive, and the room mirror 2201 The entire surface of 2 2 1 1 functions as a mirror (step 2705). After the processing of step 275, the flow returns to step 2701 again, and the processing is repeated.
ここで、 センターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0の移動動作について は、 上記した実施の形態 1と同様の動作、 即ち、 1ポジションごとに移 動させた場合は、 以下のとおりとなる。  Here, the movement operation of the center console unit 2230 is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, that is, the case where the center console unit 2230 is moved for each position is as follows.
センターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0を使用していない際には、 セン ターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0は第 2 8図に示すように、 天井部 2 2 0 0の中央前方でレール部 2 2 2 0の溝部内に支持されており、 表示部 は筐体部 2 2 3 0内に収納されている (第 1ポジション) 。  When the center console unit 2 230 is not used, the center console unit 2 230 is located at the front center of the ceiling 2 200 and the rail 2 2 as shown in Fig. 28. The display section is supported in the groove section 20 and the display section is housed in the housing section 230 (first position).
この第 1ポジションの際、 操作部 2 2 7 2への押圧操作が 1回、 即ち A方向への 1ポジション分の移動を指令する操作があると、 第 1ポジシ ヨンから運転席、 助手席の前席対応である第 2 9図に示す位置まで移動 する (第 2ポジション) 。 また、 上記と同様に操作部 2 2 7 2への押圧 操作が 1回あると、 第 2ポジションから 1ポジション分、 A方向に移動 して中間席の左右席 1 3 1、 1 3 2対応である第 2 2図に示す位置まで 移動する (第 3ポジション) 。 さらに、 1ポジション分の移動を指令す る操作があると、 第 3ポジションから 1ポジション分、 A方向に移動し て図示しない後席対応である位置まで移動する (第 4ポジション) 。 逆に、 B方向へ移動する際は、 上述した順序の逆、 即ち、 第 4ポジシ ヨンから第 2 2図 (第 3ポジション) 、 第 2 9図 (第 2ポジション) を 経て第 2 8図 (第 1ポジション) に示すように移動する。 In the first position, if there is one pressing operation on the operation unit 2 2 7 2, that is, an operation to command movement of one position in the A direction, from the first position to the driver seat and the passenger seat Move to the position shown in Fig. 29 for the front seat (second position). In the same manner as above, if there is one pressing operation on the operation unit 2 272, it moves in the A direction by one position from the second position, and it is compatible with the left and right middle seats 13 1 and 13 2 To the position shown in Fig. 22 Move (3rd position). Furthermore, if there is an operation to instruct movement of one position, the robot moves in the direction A from the third position by one position and moves to a position corresponding to a rear seat (not shown) (fourth position). On the other hand, when moving in the direction B, the order described above is reversed, that is, from the fourth position to the second position shown in FIGS. 22 (third position) and FIG. 29 (second position). Move as shown in (1st position).
この実施の形態 2では、 上記したセンターコンソールュニッ卜 2 2 3 0の設置ポジションとして 4個所としたが、 上記した実施の形態 1のよ うに 5個所のポジションとしてもよい。  In the second embodiment, the center console unit 2 230 has four installation positions, but it may have five positions as in the first embodiment.
また、 センターコンソールユニット 2 2 3 0は、 移動体の電源を O F Fした際、 どの位置に設定されていても第 1ポジションとしての第 2 8 図に示す初期位置に自動的に設定され移動するようになっている。 なお、 自動車の床部と天井部のそれぞれにレール部 2 2 2 0を設けて おき、 使用用途によって、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0をどち らかのレ一ル部 2 2 2 0に付け替えることが可能なように構成しても 良い。  In addition, the center console unit 2230 automatically moves to the initial position shown in Fig. 28 as the first position when the power of the moving object is turned off, regardless of the position set. It has become. In addition, a rail section 222 is provided on each of the floor and ceiling of the car, and depending on the intended use, the center console unit 230 can be mounted on either rail section 222. It may be configured so that it can be replaced with.
従って、 上記したように本実施の形態 2では、 レール部 2 2 2 0とセ ンターコンソールボックス 2 2 3 0とを自動車室内の天井部に設ける よう構成したため、 自動車の床部 (フロア部) を使用できないような移 動体、 即ち、 フロア部が搭乗者の通路となっているような移動体である 例えばバスや電車、 飛行機等においても、 上記した装置を利用できる環 境を提供でき、 装置の使用範囲が向上し、 移動体内の限られたスペース を有効的に活用することができるという効果が得られる。  Therefore, as described above, in the second embodiment, since the rail portion 220 and the center console box 222 are provided on the ceiling in the vehicle interior, the floor (floor portion) of the vehicle is provided. It is a moving object that cannot be used, that is, a moving object whose floor is a passage for passengers.For example, a bus, a train, an airplane, or the like can provide an environment in which the above-described device can be used. The range of use is improved, and the limited space in the moving body can be effectively used.
また、 上記したようにセンターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0に主に後 方映像を撮影する撮像手段としてのカメラを設け、 セン夕一コンソール ュニット 2 2 3 0の表示部 2 2 5 0が下方に突出している際、 ルームミ ラ一 2 2 1 0を用いて後方を見た場合、 ルームミラー 2 2 1 0の後方視 界である第 2 2図に示す破線部の一部が表示部 2 2 5 0に遮られてい るため、 後方視界が悪くなるが、 この状態の際には、 ルームミラ一 2 2 1 0の一部に設けた液晶部の表示部にカメラで撮影した後方映像をリ —ムミラ一 2 2 1 0の液晶表示部に表示することにより、 自動車の後方 視界を遮ることがあった場合でも、 運転者は常時、 良好な後方視界を得 ることができ、 装置の利便性が向上する。 In addition, as described above, a camera as an imaging means for mainly capturing a rear image is provided in the center console unit 230, and the display unit 250 of the console unit 220 is positioned downward. When protruding, When viewing the rear from the rear view, the part of the broken line shown in Fig. 22 which is the rear view of the room mirror 220 is blocked by the display section 250. Therefore, the rear view deteriorates, but in this case, the rear image captured by the camera is displayed on the display of the liquid crystal unit provided in a part of the room mirror 2201. By displaying on the liquid crystal display, even if the rear view of the vehicle is obstructed, the driver can always obtain a good rear view and the convenience of the device is improved.
なお、 上記した実施の形態 2は、 自動車の床部が使用できない場合と 限定して説明したが、 自動車の床部を使用できるものにおいても、 本装 置を使用しても良いことは言うまでもない。 実施の形態 3 .  Although the above-described Embodiment 2 has been described as being limited to the case where the floor of the car cannot be used, it goes without saying that the present device may be used even when the floor of the car can be used. . Embodiment 3.
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 3に係る移動体用機器配設装置につい て説明する。  Next, a mobile device installation device according to another embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described.
上記した実施の形態 1、 2では、 記憶手段 1 1 0 2には第 1 2図に示 す各設定値が記憶されていると説明したが、 これら設定値は初期設定値 として各設定値を使用者が適宜変更可能に構成してもよく、 このように 構成することにより使用者の利便性がさらに向上する。 実施の形態 4 .  In Embodiments 1 and 2 described above, it has been described that the set values shown in FIG. 12 are stored in the storage means 1102, but these set values are used as initial set values. The configuration may be such that the user can change it as appropriate, and this configuration further improves the convenience for the user. Embodiment 4.
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 4に係る移動体用機器配設装置につい て説明する。 .  Next, a mobile device arrangement device according to another embodiment 4 of the present invention will be described. .
上記した実施の形態 1〜 3では、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0、 2 2 3 0を移動動作させる際、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0、 2 2 3 0の前面部に設けられた操作部 2 4 1、 2 4 2、 2 2 7 2、 2 2 7 3を操作するよう説明していたが、 各座席ごとにリモートコント口一ラ ― (図示せず) を設けておき、 これらリモートコントローラ一からの操 作でもセンターコンソールュニッ卜の移動を可能に構成しても良く、 こ のように構成したことにより、 使用者の操作性がさらに向上する。 実施の形態 5 . In the above-described first to third embodiments, when the center console units 200 and 230 are moved, the operation unit provided on the front part of the center console units 200 and 230 It was explained that 2 4 1, 2 4 2, 2 2 7 2 and 2 2 7 3 were operated. -(Not shown) may be provided so that the center console unit can be moved even by operation from these remote controllers. With this configuration, the operability of the user is improved. Is further improved. Embodiment 5
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 5に係る移動体用機器配設装置につい て説明する。  Next, a mobile device arrangement device according to another embodiment 5 of the present invention will be described.
上記した実施の形態 1〜4では、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0 に設けられた表示部 2 2 0は上下方向に移動することのみ説明したが、 表示面と表示部 2 2 0の支持部 2 2 1との間に表示部 2 2 0を上下左 右方向に向きを調節できる方向調節機構を設けても良く、 このように構 成したことにより、 使用者の体型等に合わせることができ、 使用者が表 示部 2 2 0の表示面を見る際、 最適な角度で見ることができるため、 使 用者の利便性がさらに向上する。 実施の形態 6 .  In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, it has been described that the display unit 220 provided in the center console unit 200 only moves vertically, but the display surface and the support unit 2 of the display unit 220 are described. A direction adjustment mechanism that can adjust the direction of the display unit 220 in the up, down, left, and right directions may be provided between the display unit 21 and the display unit 2. When the user looks at the display surface of the display section 220, the user can see it at an optimal angle, so that the convenience of the user is further improved. Embodiment 6
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 6に係る移動体用機器配設装置及び移 動体用表示装置について説明する。  Next, a mobile device arrangement device and a mobile display device according to another embodiment 6 of the present invention will be described.
上記した実施の形態 2では、 天井部 2 2 0 0に設けられたセンターコ ンソ一ルュニット 2 2 3 0が、 天井部 2 2 0 0に設けられたレール部 2 2 2 0に案内されて自動車の前後方向に移動可能なように説明したが、 本実施の形態 6では、 実施の形態 1と同様の移動体用機器配設装置を自 動車内の床部に移動可能に設けるとともに、 天井部には移動体用表示装 置を天井部の所定箇所、 例えば第 3 0図に示すように自動車内に設けら れた前席と中間席との間に固定させて設けても良い。  In the second embodiment described above, the center console unit 220 provided on the ceiling 220 is guided by the rail 220 provided on the ceiling 220 so that the automobile In the sixth embodiment, the same mobile device arrangement device as in the first embodiment is provided so as to be movable on the floor in the vehicle, In such a case, the display device for the mobile object may be fixedly provided at a predetermined location on the ceiling, for example, between the front seat and the middle seat provided in the automobile as shown in FIG.
第 3 0図は実施の形態 6の移動体用機器配設装置及び移動体用表示 装置の概略構成を示す概略構成図、 第 3 1図は第 3 0図の要部構成を示 すブロック図、 第 3 2図は実施の形態 6の移動体用表示装置の動作の流 れを示すフローチャート、 第 3 3図は第 3 0図の要部である表示部を筐 体部内に収納した状態を示す説明図、 第 3 4図は第 3 0図の要部である 表示部を筐体部内に収納した状態を示す説明図である。 FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a mobile device arrangement device and a mobile object display according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 31 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of the device, FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a main part configuration of FIG. 30, and FIG. 32 is a flow chart of an operation of the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 33 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the display unit, which is the main part of FIG. 30, is housed in the housing, and FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the display, which is the main part of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state accommodated in the body part.
これら図において、 自動車 1 0 0内の床部には運転席と助手席との間 に設けられたレール部 1 1 0と、 このレール部の溝部内に案内され A方 向または B方向に移動するセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0とで構 成された移動体用機器配設装置と、 天井部 2 2 0 0には運転席上方に設 けられた主に後方の映像を表示するルームミラー 2 2 1 0と、 前席より 後席の搭乗者が主に利用する表示ュニット 3 0 0 0とで構成された移 動体用表示装置とが備えられている。  In these figures, a rail section 110 provided between a driver's seat and a passenger's seat is provided on the floor of a car 100, and is guided in the groove of the rail section to move in the A or B direction. A mobile device arrangement device composed of a center and console unit 200 that operates, and a room mirror that is installed above the driver's seat and that displays mainly rearward images is mounted on the ceiling 220. There is provided a display device for a mobile object, which is composed of a display unit 222 and a display unit 30000 mainly used by a passenger in a rear seat from a front seat.
表示ュニット 3 0 0 0は、 一部に表示部 3 0 2 0 (後述する) が収納 される収納部 3 0 2 1を形成した筐体部 3 0 1 0と、 この筐体部 3 0 1 0の収納部 3 0 2 1に収納可能であり、 使用者が使用する際、 係止部 3 0 1 2の係止を外しながら表示面を下方に突出させる表示部 3 0 2 0 と、 表示部 3 0 2 0の後方 (第 3 0図では手前側) に設けられ、 指令に 基づき 3 6 0 ° 方向の撮影が可能な撮像手段としてのカメラ 3 0 3 0 とで構成されている。  The display unit 3100 includes a housing section 310 in which a storage section 3201 in which a display section 3200 (described later) is partially stored is formed, and the housing section 3101. The display section 3 0 2 0 can be stored in the storage section 3 0 2 1 and the display section 3 0 2 0 projects the display surface downward while releasing the locking section 3 0 1 2 when the user uses it. The camera is provided behind the unit 320 (in FIG. 30, on the near side), and includes a camera 3030 as an imaging unit capable of capturing an image in a 360 ° direction based on a command.
次に、 第 3 1図、 第 3 2図を用いて本実施の形態 6の動作制御を行な う主要部の構成、 及び動作の流れについて説明する。  Next, the configuration of the main part that performs the operation control of the sixth embodiment and the flow of the operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.
図において、 3 1 0 0は自動車外から指令を送信する送信部 3 1 0 1 及び受信部 3 1 0 2を設けた第 1通信手段であり、 この第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0には、 受信部 3 1 0 2で受信した可視情報を表示する第 3の表示 手段としての表示部 3 1 0 3を設けている。  In the figure, reference numeral 3100 denotes a first communication unit provided with a transmission unit 3101 and a reception unit 3102 for transmitting a command from outside the vehicle, and the first communication unit 3100 includes: The display unit 310 is provided as third display means for displaying the visible information received by the receiving unit 310.
3 1 1 0は、 後述する撮像手段 3 1 2 0が撮影した映像情報を第 1通 信手段 3 1 0 0の受信部 3 1 0 2に対して送信する送信部 3 1 1 1と 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0の送信部 3 1 0 1から送信された信号を受信す る受信部 3 1 1 2とを設けた第 2通信手段である。 Reference numeral 310 denotes a first pass of video information captured by the imaging means 3120 described later. Reception receiving the signal transmitted from the transmission unit 3 1 1 1 transmitting to the reception unit 3 1 0 2 of the communication unit 3 1 0 0 and the transmission unit 3 1 0 1 of the first communication unit 3 1 0 0 This is a second communication means provided with the units 3 1 and 1 2.
本実施の形態 6の移動体用機器配設装置及び移動体用表示装置を備 えた自動車の所有者が自宅にいる時、 駐車場に駐車している自己の自動 車が悪戯や盗難などに遭っていないか等で自動車の周辺や室内等の様 子を知りたい際に、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0の送信部 3 1 0 1から自動車 内の周辺を撮影するよう操作して指令信号を送信し、 この送信部 3 1 0 1から送信された指定信号を第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の受信部 3 1 1 2 が受信し、 操作手段 2 6 0 3を介して撮像手段 3 0 3 0が撮影するよう に撮像手段 3 0 3 0に対して導通する。 このとき、 操作者が自動車の周 辺、 即ち、 自動車の周囲である 3 6 0 ° の映像や、 特定の方向を見たい ときには、 この指令も送信部 3 1 0 1から送信されるため、 撮影方向変 更手段 2 6 0 4にて撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮影方向を指令する。  When the owner of a vehicle equipped with the mobile device disposition device and the mobile device display device according to the sixth embodiment is at home, his or her own vehicle parked in the parking lot encounters mischief or theft. When you want to know the surroundings of the car or the interior of the car, etc., you need to operate the transmitter 3101 of the first communication means 3100 to shoot the surroundings inside the car and send the command signal. The receiving unit 3 1 1 2 of the second communication unit 3 1 1 2 receives the designated signal transmitted from the transmitting unit 3 1 0 1, and the imaging unit 3 0 3 via the operation unit 2 6 3 Conduction is made to the imaging means 300 so that 0 captures an image. At this time, when the operator wants to see a 360 ° image around the vehicle, that is, around the vehicle, or a specific direction, this command is also transmitted from the transmission unit 3101, so The direction changing means 2604 instructs the photographing direction of the imaging means 3030.
これを受けて撮像手段 3 0 3 0は所定方向の撮影を行ない、 この撮影 された映像情報を第 2通信手段の送信部 3 1 1 1に出力して送信部 3 1 1 1から第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0に向けて送信する。  In response to this, the imaging means 3 0 3 0 shoots in a predetermined direction, outputs the shot video information to the transmitting section 3 1 1 1 of the second communication means, and outputs the information from the transmitting section 3 1 1 1 to the first communication. Transmit to means 3100.
この送信を受けて第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0の受信部 3 1 0 2が送信信 号を受信し、 この受信に基づき、 撮像手段 3 0 3 0が撮影した映像を第 3表示手段 3 1 0 3に表示させるように構成されている。  In response to this transmission, the receiving section 3102 of the first communication means 3100 receives the transmission signal, and based on this reception, displays the video taken by the imaging means 310 on the third display means 31 0 3 is displayed.
ここで、 第 1の通信手段 3 1 0 0について、 第 3 5図、 第 3 6図を用 いて説明する。  Here, the first communication means 3100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.
第 3 5図は、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0として携帯電話 3 5 0 0を用いた ものであり、 この携帯電話 3 5 0 0は、 第 3表示手段としての表示部 3 5 1 0と、 第 2通信手段 3 2 0 0に対して指令信号を出力する操作部 3 5 2 0とで構成されている。 なお、 図示していないが、 携帯電話 3 5 0 0の内部に送信部 3 5 0 1と受信部 3 5 0 2が設けられている。 表示部 3 5 1 0に表示されている内容は、 カメラ 3 0 3 0の撮影方向を前方と して撮影したものである。 FIG. 35 shows a case where a mobile phone 350 is used as the first communication means 310, and the mobile phone 350 has a display section 3501 as a third display means. And an operation unit 3502 for outputting a command signal to the second communication means 3200. Although not shown, mobile phone 350 Inside 0, a transmission section 3501 and a reception section 3502 are provided. The content displayed on the display section 3510 is obtained by shooting with the shooting direction of the camera 3030 being forward.
また、 第 3 6図は、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0としてパーソナルコンビュ —タ (以下、 パソコンと称す) 3 6 0 0を用いたものであり、 パソコン 本体 3 6 1 0と、 このパソコン本体 3 6 1 0からの情報を表示する表示 部 3 6 2 0と、 パソコン本体 3 6 1 0に対して操作を行なう操作部であ るキーポード 3 6 3 0とから構成されている。  FIG. 36 shows a personal computer (hereinafter, referred to as a personal computer) 360, used as the first communication means 310, and the personal computer body 360, and the personal computer body. It is composed of a display section 3620 that displays information from the 3601 and a keyboard 3606 that is an operation section for performing operations on the personal computer 3601.
なお、 図示していないが、 パソコン本体 3 6 1 0には外部と通信する 通信アダプタが設けられており、 この通信アダプタにより送信部 3 5 0 1と受信部 3 5 0 2との機能を有している。 表示部 3 6 2 0の表示面 3 6 2 1に表示されている内容は、 第 3 5図と同様で、 カメラ 3 0 3 0の 撮影方向を前方として撮影したものである。  Although not shown, the PC 3601 is provided with a communication adapter for communicating with the outside, and the communication adapter has the functions of the transmitting unit 3501 and the receiving unit 3502. are doing. The content displayed on the display surface 3621 of the display section 3620 is the same as that shown in Fig. 35, and the camera 3030 is shot with the shooting direction in front.
以上のように、 通常の撮像手段 3 0 3 0は、 自動車の電源操作である イダニッシヨンを O Nし、 第 2表示手段 2 2 5 0の収納状態に基づいて 動作制御されるが、 操作手段 2 6 0 3と撮像方向変更手段 2 6 0 4を介 して指令があれば導通状態となるように構成されている。  As described above, the normal imaging means 3030 turns on the indication which is a power operation of the car, and the operation is controlled based on the stored state of the second display means 222, but the operation means 26 It is configured to be in a conductive state when there is a command via the imaging direction changing means 26 and the imaging direction changing means 26.
次に、 第 3 2図を用いて本実施の形態 6の動作の流れについて説明す る。  Next, the operation flow of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
まず、 初期状態で動作が開始され (ステップ 3 2 0 0 ) 、 イダニッシ ョンが〇 F Fか O Nかを判断し (ステツプ 3 2 0 1 ) 、 このステツプ 3 2 0 1でイダニッシヨン O F Fと判断した場合は、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0から指令信号が送信されたか否かを第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の受信部 3 1 1 2が判断する (ステップ 3 2 0 2 ) 。  First, the operation is started in the initial state (step 3200), and it is determined whether or not the indication is "FF" or "ON" (step 3201). If it is determined in this step 3201 that the indication is OFF. The receiving unit 3112 of the second communication unit 3110 determines whether the command signal has been transmitted from the first communication unit 3100 (step 3202).
このステップ 3 2 0 2で指令信号を受信したと第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の受信部 3 1 1 2が判断した場合は、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0から送信 された指令信号に撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮像方向を変更する指令が含ま れているか否かの判断を第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の受信部 3 1 1 2が行 なう (ステップ 3 2 0 3 ) 。 If the receiving unit 3111 of the second communication means 311 determines that the command signal has been received in step 3202, it transmits from the first communication means 3100. The receiving unit 3111 of the second communication unit 3110 determines whether or not the received command signal includes a command to change the imaging direction of the imaging unit 3103 (step 3). 203).
このステップ 3 2 0 3で撮像方向の変更があると判断した場合は、 撮 像方向変更手段 2 6 0 3が撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮像方向を指令に基づ いて変更し (ステップ 3 2 0 4 ) 、 操作手段 2 6 0 4が撮像手段 3 0 3 0に対して撮影を開始させる (ステップ 3 2 0 5 ) 。  If it is determined in step 3203 that there is a change in the imaging direction, the imaging direction changing unit 2603 changes the imaging direction of the imaging unit 3030 based on the command (step 3203). 0 4), and the operating means 260 4 starts the photographing of the imaging means 30 30 (step 3 205).
このステップ 3 2 0 5で撮影された映像情報を第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の送信部 3 1 1 1が第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0に向けて送信し (ステップ 3 2 0 6 ) 、 撮影終了の指令が第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0から送信されたか 否かを第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の受信部 3 1 1 2が判断し (ステップ 3 2 0 7 ) 、 このステップ 3 2 0 7で撮影終了の指令があつたと判断した場 合は、 撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮影を終了し (ステップ 3 2 0 8 ) 、 ステツ プ 3 2 0 1に戻り、 処理を繰り返す。  The transmitting section 3111 of the second communication means 31110 transmits the video information captured in step 3205 to the first communication means 3110 (step 3206), The receiving section 3 1 1 2 of the second communication means 311 determines whether or not a command to end the photographing has been transmitted from the first communication means 3 1 0 0 (step 3 2 0 7). If it is determined in 07 that an instruction to end imaging has been given, the imaging by the imaging means 3030 is ended (step 3208), the process returns to step 3201, and the processing is repeated.
また、 ステップ 3 2 0 1でイダ二ッションが O N状態と判断した場合 は、 第 2 7図に示すステップ 1 7 0 1へ進み、 以降の動作を行なう。 また、 ステップ 3 2 0 2で第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0からの指令信号が送 信されていないと判断した場合は、 再度ステップ 3 2 0 1に戻り、 動作 を繰り返す。  If it is determined in step 3201 that the induction is in the ON state, the flow advances to step 1701 shown in FIG. 27 to perform the subsequent operations. If it is determined in step 3202 that the command signal from the first communication means 3100 has not been transmitted, the process returns to step 3201 again to repeat the operation.
さらに、 ステップ 3 2 0 3で撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮影方向を変更する 指令信号が受信されなかった場合は、 撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮影方向は現 在、 設定されている方向でいいと判断して撮影方向を変更せずに撮像手 段 3 0 3 0の撮影を開始する (ステツプ 3 2 0 9 ) 。  Further, if no command signal for changing the photographing direction of the image pickup means 3003 is received in step 3203, the photographing direction of the image pickup means 3300 may be the direction currently set. Then, the photographing of the photographing means 310 is started without changing the photographing direction (step 3209).
また、 ステップ 3 2 0 7で撮影終了の指令が第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0か ら送信されなていないと判断した場合は、 再度、 ステップ 3 2 0 6に戻 り、 処理を繰り返す。 なお、 第 3 3図、 第 3 4図は自動車の右後方から見た説明図であり、 第 3 3図は表示ュニット 3 0 0 0に設けられた表示部 3 0 2 0を収納 し、 撮像手段であるカメラ 3 0 3 0の撮影方向は自動車後方 (第 3 3図 では手前側) に向いている状態を示しており、 第 3 4図は係止部 3 0 1 2を操作して筐体部 3 0 1 0に形成された表示部 3 0 2 0の収納部 3 0 1 1から下方に突出させた状態を示している。 カメラ 3 0 3 0の撮影 方向は第 3 3図と同じである。 If it is determined in step 3207 that a command to end photographing has not been transmitted from the first communication means 3100, the process returns to step 3206 again, and the processing is repeated. FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are explanatory views as viewed from the right rear of the automobile. FIG. 33 shows a display unit 300 provided in the display unit 300, which is stored in the vehicle. The photographing direction of the camera 3030, which is a means, is shown to be facing the rear of the car (in FIG. 33, this side), and FIG. 34 shows the case where the locking section 3102 is operated to operate the housing. The figure shows a state in which the display unit 310 is formed so as to protrude downward from the storage unit 310 1 formed in the body 310. The shooting direction of the camera 3030 is the same as in FIG.
従って、 上記したように本実施の形態 6では、 携帯電話 3 5 0 0ゃパ ソコン 3 6 0 0と通信する第 2通信手段を自動車内に設け、 自動車内が 無人の時でも、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0としての携帯電話 3 5 0 0ゃパソ コン 3 6 0 0を用いて自動車室内や周囲の映像を見ることができるよ う構成したので、 無人自動車の監視を簡単に行なえ、 使用者の利便性が 向上するという効果が得られる。 実施の形態 7 .  Therefore, as described above, in the sixth embodiment, the second communication means for communicating with the mobile phone 350 and the personal computer 360 is provided in the car, and the first communication means is provided even when the car is unmanned. Means 3100 The mobile phone 3500 can be used to view images of the vehicle interior and surroundings using a personal computer 3600, so that unmanned vehicles can be easily monitored and used. This has the effect of improving the convenience of the person. Embodiment 7
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 7に係る移動体用表示装置を用いた移 動体用機器配設装置について第 3 7図〜第 3 9図を用いて説明する。 第 3 7図は自動車内に設けられた中間席にチヤィルドシートを搭載 し、 このチヤィルドシートに幼児が着座している状態を示した説明図、 第 3 8図は撮像手段としてのカメラ 3 0 3 0でチャイルドシ一トに着 座している幼児を撮影した映像を自動車内に設けた表示部に表示して いる状態を示す説明図、 第 3 9図は第 3 8図で説明した表示部の表示拡 大図である。  Next, a mobile device installation device using a mobile display device according to Embodiment 7 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. FIG. 37 is an explanatory view showing a state in which a child seat is mounted on an intermediate seat provided in an automobile, and an infant is seated on the seat, and FIG. 38 is a camera 300 as an image pickup means. Explanatory drawing showing the image of a child sitting in a child seat taken on the display provided in the car.Fig. 39 shows the display of the display described in Fig. 38. It is an enlarged view.
上記した実施の形態 6では、 外部の第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0に自動車室 内の様子や自動車の周囲の様子を送信するよう説明したが、 カメラ 3 0 3 0で撮影した自動車室内の映像を自動車内のインストウルメントパ ネル 1 0 2に設けられた表示装置 1 0 6に表示させるようにしてもよ レ^ In Embodiment 6 described above, the state inside the car room and the state around the car are transmitted to the external first communication means 3100. The instrument pack in the car The display may be performed on a display device 106 provided in the panel 102.
特に、 目が離せない幼児や妊婦などが自動車に搭乗している際、 運転 者は走行時、 後方を振り返ることができない。 このため、 カメラ 3 0 3 0で撮影した映像をィンストウルメントパネル 1 0 2に設けられた表 示装置 1 0 6に表示させるようにするものであり、 運転席の近傍にカメ ラ 3 0 3 0の撮影を行なわせる操作部 (図示せず) が設けられており、 自動車室内の状況をィンストウルメントパネル 1 0 2に設けられた表 示装置 1 0 6に表示させる際は、 操作部を操作してカメラ 3 0 3 0で撮 影させて表示装置 1 0 6に表示されるようになっている。 また、 第 3 7 図では、 カメラ 3 0 3 0の撮影方向が後方になっているが、 撮影方向の 変更も可能となっている。  In particular, when an infant or pregnant woman who cannot keep an eye on the car is riding in a car, the driver cannot look back when driving. For this reason, the video taken by the camera 300 is displayed on the display device 106 provided on the instrument panel 102, and the camera 30 is located near the driver's seat. An operation unit (not shown) for taking a picture of the camera 30 is provided. When the status of the interior of the car is displayed on the display device 106 provided on the instrument panel 102, an operation is performed. By operating the unit, the image is taken by the camera 303 and displayed on the display device 106. Further, in FIG. 37, the shooting direction of the camera 3030 is backward, but the shooting direction can be changed.
従って、 上記のように構成したので本実施の形態 7は自動車室内の映 像を間近にある表示装置に表示させることができ、 装置の利用範囲が広 がり、 装置の利便性がさらに向上する。 実施の形態 8 .  Therefore, with the above-described configuration, the seventh embodiment can display an image in the vehicle cabin on a nearby display device, so that the range of use of the device is widened and the convenience of the device is further improved. Embodiment 8
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 8に係る移動体用機器配設装置につい て第 4 0図〜第 4 2図を用いて説明する。  Next, a mobile device installation device according to another embodiment 8 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42. FIG.
実施の形態 1 、 2では、 センターコンソールユニット 2 0 0を移動さ せる際、 センタ一コンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0の前面部に設けられた操作 部 2 4 1 、 2 4 2を操作するように説明したが、 本実施の形態 8では、 自動車内に設けられた各座席に着座している着座者を検出し、 着座して いる座席に対応した箇所への移動をさらに簡単に選択できるようにし たものである。  In the first and second embodiments, when the center console unit 200 is moved, the operation units 24 1 and 24 2 provided on the front part of the center console unit 200 are operated. However, in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to detect a occupant seated in each seat provided in the automobile and to more easily select a movement to a position corresponding to the seated seat. It is.
第 4 0図において、 4 0 0 1は自動車内に設けられた各座席に着座者 がいるか否かを検出する着座者検出手段であり、 この着座者検出手段 4 0 0 1は座席の略中央部に圧力センサや乗員カメラ等 (図示せず) が設 けられており、 着座者がいると圧力センサに押圧力がかかるため着座者 ありと検出されるものであり、 また、 乗員カメラで座席上を撮影して画 像解析を行なって着座者の有無を検出するものである。 4 0 0 2は着座 者検出手段 4 0 0 1が検出した結果に基づき、 各座席に着座者がいるか 否かを判断する着座者有無判断手段である。 この着座者有無判断手段 4 0 0 2は、 着座者検出手段 4 0 0 1が検出した結果から、 荷物を置いて いるだけの座席等は着座者なしと判断するものである。 In FIG. 40, reference numeral 4001 denotes a seated person in each seat provided in the automobile. The seat occupant detection means 4001 has a pressure sensor, an occupant camera, etc. (not shown) provided substantially at the center of the seat. When a passenger is present, a pressing force is applied to the pressure sensor, so that the presence of a seated person is detected. In addition, the presence or absence of a seated person is detected by taking an image of the seat with an occupant camera and performing image analysis. Reference numeral 4002 denotes occupant presence / absence determination means for determining whether or not each seat has a occupant based on the result detected by the occupant detection means 4001. The occupant presence / absence judging means 4002 judges from the result of the detection by the occupant detecting means 4001 that a seat or the like only holding luggage has no occupant.
4 0 0 3は着座者検出手段 4 0 0 1が着座者ありと検出した座席の 着座者の姿勢や体型等を判断するポジションセンサ (図示せず) が設け られたものであり、 4 0 0 4は着座者有無判断手段 4 0 0 2と着座者状 態判断手段 4 0 0 3とから出力された結果に基づき、 着座者がいる座席 を一覧表示するよう表示部 1 0 6、 2 2 0に対して表示制御を行なう表 示制御手段、 この表示制御手段 4 0 0 4の制御に基づき、 第 4 1図に示 すように表示部 1 0 6、 2 2 0に一覧表示し、 この内容を使用者が確認 して選択操作し、 この操作に基づき、 設定値選択手段 4 0 0 6は、 記憶 手段 4 0 0 7 (後述する) に記憶された移動設定値から所定の設定値を 選択し、 この設定値を出力するものである。 4 0 0 7は第 1 2図に示し たように自動車室内に設けられた各座) ¾ 1 2 0、 1 3 0の位置それぞれ に、 車輪部 2 0 1が移動する方向及び距離と、 センタ一コンソールュニ ッ 卜 2 0 0に設けられた表示部 2 2 0をセンタ一コンソ一ルュニット 2 0 0の上面から突出させるか否かの設定値と、 センタ一コンソールュ ニット 2 0 0に設けられた操作部 2 3 0をセンターコンソ一ルュニッ ト 2 0 0の上面から突出させるか否かの設定値とを対応させて記憶し た記憶手段である。 また、 4 0 0 8は設定値選択手段 4 0 0 6が出力された記憶手段 4 0 0 7から選択した移動設定値、 表示手段突出設定値としての表示部設定 値及び操作手段突出設定値としての操作部設定値に基づき、 センターコ ンソ一ルュニット 2 0 0を移動設定値に応じた移動を行い、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる移動制御手段であり、 4 0 0 9は移動制御手段 4 0 0 8が出力した制御信号に基づき、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0を 第 1図に示す A方向または B方向に移動させ、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2Reference numeral 4003 is provided with a position sensor (not shown) for judging the posture, body shape, etc. of the occupant of the seat detected by the occupant detection means 4001 as having an occupant. 4 is a display unit 106, 2200 for displaying a list of seats where the occupants are located, based on the results output from the occupant presence / absence determination means 4002 and the occupant state determination means 4003. Display control means for performing display control on the display, based on the control of the display control means 404, as shown in a list on the display units 106 and 220 as shown in FIG. The user confirms the selection and performs a selection operation.Based on this operation, the setting value selection means 4006 selects a predetermined setting value from the movement setting values stored in the storage means 40007 (described later). Then, this set value is output. 40007 is each seat provided in the car interior as shown in Fig. 12)) At each of the positions of 120 and 130, the direction and distance in which the wheel 201 moves, the center The setting value of whether or not the display unit 220 provided on the console unit 200 is projected from the upper surface of the center console unit 200, and the operation provided on the center console unit 200 This is storage means for storing a set value of whether or not the unit 230 is projected from the upper surface of the center console unit 200 in association with each other. Also, reference numeral 400 denotes a movement set value selected from the storage means 400 output from the set value selection means 400, a display section set value as a display means protrusion set value, and an operation means protrusion set value. The center console unit 200 is moved according to the set value based on the set value of the operation unit, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are projected from the upper surface of the housing unit 210. Movement control means to be accommodated in the housing part 210, and reference numeral 4009 designates the center console unit 200 as shown in FIG. 1 based on the control signal output by the movement control means 408. Move in the direction A or B as shown, and
3 0とを筐体部 2 1 0の上面に突出させたり筐体部 2 1 0内に収納さ せる移動手段であり、 実施の形態 1で説明した構成と同様に移動手段 430 is a moving means that protrudes from the upper surface of the housing part 210 or is housed in the housing part 210. The moving means 4 is similar to the structure described in the first embodiment.
0 0 9は車輪部 2 0 1、 この車輪部 2 0 1の外周面に形成された嚙合部 2 0 2、車輪部 2 0 1に内蔵され駆動部(図示せず)、 レール部 1 1 0、 このレール部 1 1 0の溝内に形成された係止部 1 1 1、 並びに、 表示部 2 2 0の駆動機構及び操作部 2 3 0の駆動機構とで構成されている。 なお、 4 0 0 5は着座者有無判断手段 4 0 0 2と着座者状態判断手段Reference numeral 009 denotes a wheel portion 201, a coupling portion 202 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the wheel portion 201, a driving portion (not shown) built in the wheel portion 201, and a rail portion 110. An engaging portion 111 formed in the groove of the rail portion 110, a driving mechanism of the display portion 220 and a driving mechanism of the operating portion 230 are provided. Note that 4005 is a seated person presence / absence determination means 4002 and a seated person state determination means
4 0 0 3とから出力された結果に基づき、 自動車内に設けられたエアパ ッグ装置 (図示せず) の動作を制御させるエアバッグ制御手段であり、 このエアバッグ制御手段 4 0 0 5が制御対象とするエアバッグ装置は、 ァドバンスド ·エアバッグ装置という。 The air bag control means controls the operation of an air bag device (not shown) provided in the vehicle based on the result output from the control means. The airbag device to be controlled is called an advanced airbag device.
次に、 第 4 2図を用いて動作の流れについて説明する。  Next, the operation flow will be described with reference to FIG.
自動車のィグニッションを O Nすると装置の動作が開始され (ステツ プ 4 2 0 0 ) 、 着座者検出手段 4 0 0 1で自動車内の各座席の着座者を 検出し (ステップ 4 2 0 1 ) 、 このステップ 4 2 0 1の処理後、 着座者 有無判断手段が着座者の有無を判断したか否かを判断し (ステップ 4 2 0 2 ) 、 このステップ 4 2 0 2で着座者有無を判断したと判断した場合 は、 表示制御手段 4 0 0 4が表示部 1 0 6 , 2 2 0に着座者一覧を表示 させ (ステップ 4 2 0 3 ) 、 このステップ 4 2 0 3で表示された一覧表 示から使用者がどの座席対応でセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0を 移動させるかの選択を行なったか否かを判断し (ステップ 4 2 0 4 ) 、 このステップ 4 2 0 4で選択されたと判断した場合は、 この選択に対応 した各設定値を設定値選択手段 4 0 0 6が記憶手段 4 0 0 7から選択 し、 この選択された設定値に基づき、 移動制御手段 4 0 0 8が移動手段 4 0 0 9を移動させる (ステップ 4 2 0 5 ) 。 このステップ 4 2 0 5の 処理の後、 移動が完了したか否かを判断し (ステップ 4 2 0 6 ) 、 ステ ップ 4 2 0 6で移動が完了したと判断した際は、 ステップ 4 2 0 1に戻 り、 処理を繰り返す。 When the ignition of the car is turned on, the operation of the device is started (step 4200), and the occupant detection means 4001 detects the occupant of each seat in the car (step 4201). After the processing of step 4201, it is determined whether or not the occupant presence / absence determining means has determined the presence or absence of a occupant (step 4202). If judged, the display control means 400 displays a list of occupants on the display sections 106 and 220. (Step 420), and from the list displayed in Step 4203, it is determined whether or not the user has selected which seat to move the center console unit 200 to. It is determined (step 4204), and when it is determined that the selection has been made in step 4204, each set value corresponding to this selection is stored in the setting value selection means 4006 from the storage means 40.07. Then, based on the selected set value, the movement control means 408 moves the movement means 409 (step 425). After the processing in step 420, it is determined whether or not the movement has been completed (step 420), and if it is determined in step 420 that the movement has been completed, step 42 0 Return to 1 and repeat the process.
また、 ステツプ 4 2 0 2で着座者の有無を判断していないと判断した 場合は、 再度ステップ 4 2 0 1に戻り、 処理を繰り返す。  If it is determined in step 4202 that the presence or absence of a seated person has not been determined, the process returns to step 4201 again to repeat the processing.
また、 ステップ 4 2 0 2で着座者有無の判断を行なったと判断した場 合、 ステップ 4 2 0 3に進むとともに、 エアバッグ制御手段 4 0 0 5に 着座者有無判断手段の判断結果を出力してエアバッグ装置の動作待機 状態となる (ステップ 4 2 0 7 ) 。 この後、 イダニッシヨンが O F Fさ れたか否かを判断し (ステップ 4 2 0 8 ) 、 このステップ 4 2 0 8でィ グニッションが O F Fされたと判断した場合は、 エアバッグ装置の動作 制御が終了する (ステップ 4 2 0 9 ) 。  If it is determined that the presence or absence of a occupant has been determined in step 402, the process proceeds to step 423, and the determination result of the presence / absence determination means is output to the airbag control means 405. As a result, the operation of the airbag apparatus is in a standby state (step 4207). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the ignition has been turned off (step 408). If it is determined in this step 408 that the ignition has been turned off, the operation control of the airbag device ends (step 408). Step 4 209).
次に、 ステップ 4 2 0 4で選択操作がないと設定値選択手段 4 0 0 6 が判断した場合は、 再度、 ステップ 4 2 0 3に戻り、 処理を繰り返す。 また、 ステップ 4 2 0 6でセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0の移動 が完了していないと判断した場合は、 ステップ 4 2 0 5に戻り、 処理を 繰り返す。  Next, when the setting value selection means 4006 determines that there is no selection operation in step 4204, the process returns to step 4203 again and repeats the processing. If it is determined in step 420 that the movement of the center console unit 200 has not been completed, the process returns to step 420 and repeats the processing.
また、 ステップ 4 2 0 8でイダニッシヨン O F Fされていないと判断 した場合は、 再度ステップ 4 2 0 8に戻り、 エアバッグ装置の動作待機 状態を継続させる。 If it is determined in step 408 that the ignition has not been turned off, the flow returns to step 408 again to wait for the operation of the airbag device. Keep the state.
従って、 上記のようにエアバッグ装置に用いる着座者情報を移動体用 機器配設装置の移動設定に有効利用できるように構成したため、 使用者 がセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0を移動する際の煩わしい操作を 最低限の操作のみにできるので、 装置の操作性、 及び装置の利便性がさ らに向上する。 実施の形態 9 .  Therefore, as described above, since the occupant information used for the airbag device is configured to be effectively used for the movement setting of the mobile device disposition device, when the user moves the center console unit 200, Since the troublesome operation can be reduced to the minimum operation, the operability of the device and the convenience of the device are further improved. Embodiment 9
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 9に係る移動体用情報処理装置を用い た移動体用機器配設装置について第 4 3図〜第 4 5図を用いて説明す る。 第 4 3図は移動体用情報処理装置にナビゲ一シヨン装置を備えた構 成を示す構成図、 第 4 4図は第 4 3図の装置に表示される表示例を示し た説明図、 第 4 5図は第 4 3図に示す移動体用情報処理装置の動作の流 れを示すフロ一チャートである。  Next, a mobile device arrangement device using a mobile object information processing device according to Embodiment 9 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. FIG. FIG. 43 is a configuration diagram showing a configuration in which a navigation device is provided in a mobile information processing device. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example displayed on the device of FIG. 43. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow of the operation of the information processing apparatus for a mobile object shown in FIG.
第 4 3図において、 レシ一ト等の情報源を撮像手段としてのカメラ 1 0 8や、 カメラ 2 5 0で取り込み、 インストウルメン卜パネル 1 0 2に 設けられた表示部 1 0 6やセンタ一コンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0に設け られた表示部 2 2 0に表示されるものであり、 4 3 0 1はカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0で撮影され、 出力された可視情報と後述する記憶手段に記憶され たカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0で撮影された可視情報を解析するための可視情 報が示された辞書情報とを比較して解析する解析手段、 4 3 0 2.は解析 手段 4 3 0 1がカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0で撮影した可視情報の内容を解析 する際に比較対象とする可視情報としての辞書情報を記憶した記憶手 段であり、 この記憶手段 4 3 0 1には、 実施の形態 1でも説明したよう に、 図形や記号、 アルファベットやひらがな、 かたかな、 漢字、 数字等 の文字を認識する上で必要な辞書情報を記憶している。 また、 4 3 0 3は表示部 1 0 6や表示部 2 2 0に自車の現在位置や現 在位置周辺の地図情報等を表示させるナビゲーシヨン手段であり、 この ナビゲーション手段 4 3 0 3は目的地の設定や、 この目的地までの経路 探索、 経路誘導等が行なえるものである。 4 3 0 4はナビゲ一シヨン手 段 4 3 0 3に対して所定の操作を行なう操作手段であり、 この操作手段 4 3 0 4は目的地や経路探索等の設定を決定する時などに操作するも のである。 In FIG. 43, an information source such as a receipt is captured by a camera 108 or a camera 250 as an imaging means, and a display unit 106 and a center provided on an instrument panel 102 are provided. This is displayed on a display unit 220 provided in one console unit 200. Reference numeral 430 denotes a camera 108, which is photographed by a camera 250, and output visible information and storage means to be described later. Means for analyzing by comparing the visible information captured by the cameras 108 and 250 stored in the camera with dictionary information indicating the visible information, and 430. 4301 is a storage means for storing dictionary information as visible information to be compared when analyzing the contents of visible information captured by the cameras 108 and 250. As described in Embodiment 1, figures and symbols, alphabets and hiragana, katakana, It stores dictionary information necessary for recognizing characters such as letters and numbers. Reference numeral 4303 denotes navigation means for displaying the current position of the vehicle and map information around the current position on the display section 106 and the display section 220. It can set destinations, search for routes to these destinations, and provide route guidance. 4304 is an operation means for performing a predetermined operation on the navigation means 4303, and this operation means 4304 is operated when determining settings such as a destination and a route search. It does.
4 3 0 5は解析手段 4 3 0 1の解析結果とナビゲーション手段 4 3 0 3からの現在位置情報等とに基づき、 表示部 1 0 6や表示部 2 2 0に 表示させる表示制御手段であり、 この表示制御手段 4 3 0 5の表示制御 信号はナビゲーション手段 4 3 0 3に出力され、 ナビゲーション手段 4 3 0 3では、 この表示制御信号を受けて解析手段 4 3 0 1が解析した結 果を目的地設定や経路探索、 経路誘導の設定等に反映させて再度、 表示 制御手段 4 3 0 5に出力し、 表示部 1 0 6や表示部 2 2 0に表示させる < 実施の形態 1で説明した第 2 0図を用いて説明すると、 例えば、 気に 入った店のレシ一トを持っていて、 この店までの経路案内をナビゲ一シ ョン手段 4 3 0 3にさせる場合、 レシ一 1、の内容をカメラ 1 2 8や 2 5 0で読み込ませて、解析手段 4 3 0 1にて文字解析等を行なう。 この時、 レシートには 2 0 0 2に示すように 「東京都立川市一番町 6丁目」 とい う住所が記載されていることから、 この住所デ一タをナピゲ一シヨン手 段 4 3 0 3が目的地と設定するか否かを使用者に確認させる。 この際の 表示部 1 0 6や表示部 2 2 0の表示例が第 4 4図に示すとおりであり、 ここで、 「Y E S」 を選択するとレシートに記載していた住所が目的地 として設定され、 使用者の住所入力等の操作なしで目的地の設定や、 こ の目的地設定後にこの目的地までの経路探索、 経路誘導を行なわせるこ とができるものである。 次に、 第 45図を用いて動作の流れについて説明する。 4305 is a display control means for displaying on the display section 106 or the display section 220 based on the analysis result of the analysis means 4301 and the current position information from the navigation means 4303. The display control signal of the display control means 4305 is output to the navigation means 430.3, and the navigation means 4303 receives the display control signal and analyzes the result by the analysis means 4301. Is reflected in the destination setting, route search, route guidance setting, etc., output to the display control means 4305 again, and displayed on the display unit 106 and the display unit 220 <in the first embodiment. To explain using FIG. 20 described above, for example, if you have a favorite store recipe and you want the navigation means 4303 to provide route guidance to this store, The contents of (1) are read by the camera (128) or (250) and character analysis is performed by the analyzing means (430). At this time, as shown on the receipt, the address “6, Ichibancho, Tachikawa-shi, Tokyo” is written on the receipt. The user is asked whether 3 is set as the destination. At this time, the display examples of the display unit 106 and the display unit 220 are as shown in FIG. 44, and if "YES" is selected, the address described on the receipt is set as the destination. In addition, it is possible to set a destination without a user inputting an address or the like, and to perform a route search and a route guidance to the destination after the destination is set. Next, the operation flow will be described with reference to FIG.
イダ二ッションが ONされると装置の動作が開始され (ステップ 45 00) 、 カメラ 1 2 8、 2 50で可視情報であるレシートの文字情報が 読み込まれた否か判断し (ステップ 2 1 0 2) 、 読み込まれたと判断し た場合は、 この読み込まれた文字情報が記憶手段 430 2に記憶されて いるどの文字情報に該当しているかを解析手段 430 1が解析する (ス テツプ 2 1 02) 。 このステップ 2 1 02で解析手段 430 1は解析し た内容がナビゲーション手段 4 3 0 3で用いられる関連情報か否かを 判断し (ステップ 450 1 ) 、 このステップ 45 0 1でナビゲ一シヨン 手段 43 03に関連する情報と判断した場合は、 ナビゲーシヨン手段 4 303の設定を行なう設定機能を表示する (ステップ 4502) 。 この ステップ 4502で表示される表示例は第 44図に示すものである。 次に、 ステップ 4502で表示した内容に対して選択操作がなされた か否かをナビゲーション手段 43 0 3が判断する(ステップ 45 0 3)。 この選択操作とは、 第 44図に示すような表示の際、 「YE S」 か 「N 0」 を選択することを示している。  When the induction is turned on, the operation of the apparatus is started (step 4500), and it is determined whether or not the text information of the receipt, which is visible information, is read by the cameras 128, 250 (step 2102). If it is determined that the character information has been read, the analyzing means 430 1 analyzes which character information stored in the storage means 4302 corresponds to the read character information (step 2 102). . In this step 2102, the analysis means 430 1 determines whether or not the analyzed content is related information used in the navigation means 4303 (step 4501), and in this step 4501, the navigation means 43 If the information is determined to be related to 03, a setting function for setting the navigation means 4303 is displayed (step 4502). The display example displayed in this step 4502 is shown in FIG. Next, the navigation means 4303 determines whether or not a selection operation has been performed on the content displayed in step 4502 (step 4503). This selection operation indicates that “YE S” or “N 0” is selected in the display as shown in FIG.
このステップ 45 03で選択操作されたと判断した場合は、 ナビゲー ション手段 430 3が設定動作を行なう (ステップ 45 04) 。 第 44 図に示す内容であれば目的地としての設定動作を行なう。  If it is determined in step 4503 that the selection operation has been performed, the navigation means 4303 performs a setting operation (step 4504). If the contents are as shown in FIG. 44, the setting operation as the destination is performed.
次に、 ステップ 4504での設定動作した内容を盛り込んだ内容の表 示を表示制御手段 430 5が表示部 1 0 6や表示部 2 2 Qに対して表 示させる (ステップ 4505) 。 このステップ 4505の処理後、 ステ ップ 2 1 0 1に戻り、 以下、 処理を繰り返し行なう。  Next, the display control means 4305 causes the display unit 106 and the display unit 22Q to display a display of the content including the content set in step 4504 (step 4505). After the process of step 4505, the process returns to step 2101, and thereafter, the process is repeated.
また、 ステップ 2 1 0 1で可視情報が読み込まれていないと判断した 場合は、 再度ステップ 2 1 0 1に戻り、 可視情報の読み込みが完了する まで繰り返す。 また、 ステップ 4 5 0 1でナビゲーション手段 4 3 0 3がナビゲ一シ ョン手段 4 3 0 3の設定値に関連する文字情報ではないと判断した場 合は、 第 2 1図に示すステップ 2 1 0 0に進む (ステップ 4 5 0 6 ) 。 また、 ステップ 4 5 0 3で選択操作されていないと判断した場合は、 再度ステップ 4 5 0 3に戻り、 処理を繰り返す。 If it is determined in step 211 that the visible information has not been read, the process returns to step 211 again and repeats until the reading of the visible information is completed. If it is determined in step 4501 that the navigation means 4303 is not character information related to the setting value of the navigation means 4303, the processing proceeds to step 2 shown in FIG. Proceed to 100 (step 4506). If it is determined in step 4503 that the selection operation has not been performed, the process returns to step 4503 again to repeat the processing.
従って、 上記のようにレシート等の可視情報からナビゲーション機能 に関連する情報を解析し、 選択操作を簡単に行ないやすくしたので、 ナ ピゲーションの設定操作を極めて簡素化でき、 使用者の利便性及び装置 の操作性が向上する。 実施の形態 1 0 .  Therefore, as described above, the information related to the navigation function is analyzed from the visible information such as receipts, and the selection operation is easily performed. Therefore, the operation for setting the navigation can be extremely simplified, and the user convenience and the device Operability is improved. Embodiment 10
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 1 0に係る移動体用情報処理装置につ いて説明する。  Next, a moving object information processing apparatus according to another embodiment 10 of the present invention will be described.
上記した実施の形態 9は、 好印象だった店のレシートや地図等を持つ ていれば、 その店の位置を自動車に設置されたナビゲーション装置にメ モリして、 将来のドライブ時に手軽に利用できるのでしたものを説明し たが、 ドライブ時に支払った費用の計算等も行なえるようにしてもよい c 即ち、 第 2 2図に示すレシートの金額等を集計し、 品目の内訳やそれ らに支払った費用を一覧表示してもよく、 このように構成することによ り、 家計簿代わりに利用することができ、 装置の使用範囲が広がり、 使 用対象者の性別や年齢層も広げられるという効果が得られる。 実施の形態 1 1 . In the ninth embodiment described above, if the store has a good impression of a store receipt, map, etc., the store position can be stored in the navigation device installed in the car and can be easily used when driving in the future has been described what it did, calculation or the like of the expenses paid drive during good c ie even in the so performed also counts the amount of receipts shown in the second 2 figure paid breakdown and its these materials The cost may be displayed in a list, and this configuration can be used as a household account book, expanding the range of use of the device, and expanding the gender and age of the target user. The effect is obtained. Embodiment 11 1.
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 1 1に係る移動体用機器配設装置につ いて、 説明する。  Next, a mobile device installation device according to another embodiment 11 of the present invention will be described.
上記した実施の形態 1、 2では、 使用者の操作によって自動的にセン 夕一コンソールュニット 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0を移動させることを説明した 力 自動車の動力源をオフ、 即ち、 イダ二ッシ.ヨンスィッチをオフした 際に、 センタ一コンソールユニット 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0を予め設定された 位置、 即ち、 デフォルト位置に自動的に戻るよう移動させるように構成 しても良い。 . In the first and second embodiments described above, the sensor is automatically activated by a user operation. Evening console unit 200, the force that explained the movement of the two-hundred and two-hundred force When the power source of the car was turned off, that is, when the power switch was turned off, the center one console unit 200, The configuration may be such that 222 is automatically moved to a preset position, that is, a default position. .
従って、 上記のように構成したことにより、 予め設定された設定位置 は使用者が使用しゃすい位置であることから、 センターコンソールュニ ット 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0の移動によって変更された位置を自動車のィダニ ッシヨンをオフする際にリセッ卜し、 デフォルト位置に自動的に移動さ せることができ、 使用者が搭乗する度にセンタ一コンソールユニット 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0の移動を余儀なくされることなく、 使用者の利便性が向 上する。 実施の形態 1 2 .  Therefore, with the above-described configuration, the preset position is a position where the user can use lightly, and thus the position is changed by moving the center console units 200 and 220. The position can be reset when the car's guidance is turned off and automatically moved to the default position, and the center-to-console unit 200, 220 can be moved each time the user gets on the vehicle. The convenience of the user is improved without being forced. Embodiment 1 2.
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 1 2に係る移動体用機器配設装置につ いて、 説明する。  Next, a mobile device installation device according to another embodiment 12 of the present invention will be described.
上記した実施の形態 1 1では、 自動車の動力源をオフ、 即ち、 イダ二 ッションスィツチをオフした際に、 センターコンソールュニッ卜 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0を予め設定された位置、 即ち、 デフォルト位置に自動的に戻る よう移動させるように構成することを説明したが、 デフォルト位置を自 動車の使用頻度が一番高い搭乗者である運転手の着座席、 即ち、 運転席 と助手席との間に挟まれた位置に設定しておいても良い。  In the above-described embodiment 11, when the power source of the vehicle is turned off, that is, when the induction switch is turned off, the center console units 200 and 220 are set to predetermined positions, that is, default positions. It has been described that the system is configured to move back to the position automatically.However, the default position is set as the seating position of the driver who is the most frequent passenger of the vehicle, that is, the driver's seat and the passenger's seat. It may be set at a position sandwiched between them.
従って、 自動車の使用頻度が最も高い運転手の座席に対応する位置を デフオル卜位置として予め設定しておくため、 運転手の利便性が向上す る。 実施の形態 1 3 . Therefore, since the position corresponding to the driver's seat with the highest frequency of use of the vehicle is set in advance as the default position, the convenience of the driver is improved. Embodiment 1 3.
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 1 3に係る移動体用機器配設装置につ いて、 説明する。  Next, a mobile device arrangement device according to another embodiment 13 of the present invention will be described.
上記した実施の形態 1〜 1 2では、 インストウルメントパネル 1 0 2 に設けられた表示部 1 0 6の情報と、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0に設けられた表示部 2 2 0、 表示部 2 2 5 0、 表示ュニッ 卜 3 0 0 0に設けられた表示部 3 0 2 0の情報との関係について説明 していなかったが、 これらの表示部に送信部と受信部を設けても良い。 即ち、 一方の表示部で表示している内容を互いの送受信部を用いて他 方の表示部に表示するようにしてもよく、 自動車内に多くの搭乗者がい る際など、 全員で同じ情報を共有できため、 装置の使用範囲を広げるこ とができ、 使用者の利便性が向上する。  In Embodiments 1 to 12 described above, the information of the display unit 106 provided in the instrument panel 102 and the display unit provided in the center console unit 200, 220 The relationship between the information on the display unit 220 provided in the display unit 220, the display unit 250, and the display unit 300 was not described. A part may be provided. In other words, the content displayed on one display unit may be displayed on the other display unit using the transmission / reception unit of each other, and the same information may be used by all members, for example, when there are many passengers in the car. Since the device can be shared, the range of use of the device can be expanded, and user convenience is improved.
なお、 上記送受信部は、 赤外線を用いたものや、 B l u e t o o t h の技術などを用いてもよい。 実施の形態 1 4 .  Note that the transmitting and receiving unit may use an infrared ray, a Bluetooth technology, or the like. Embodiment 1 4.
次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 1 4に係る移動体用機器配設装置につ いて、 説明する。  Next, a mobile device arrangement device according to another embodiment 14 of the present invention will be described.
上記した実施の形態 1、 2では、センターコンソールュニッ卜 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0の設定値としてセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0 の移動設定値と、 表示部の突出設定値と、 操作部の突出設定値の 3種類 の設定値を記憶するように説明していたが、 各設定値それぞれ一種類の みの設定値だけで構成してもよく、 記憶手段のメモリ容量を極力小さく できる上、 装置の利便性も得ることができる。 産業上の利用可能性 以上のように、 この発明にかかる移動体用情報処理装置は、 自動車等 の移動体において、 レシートや観光ガイドブック等の可視情報を撮像手 段で読み取り、 この内容を解析して所定の情報処理を行なって表示する 移動体用の情報処理装置として用いるのに適している。 In Embodiments 1 and 2 described above, the center console units 200 and 220 are set as the set values of the center console units 200 and 220 and the movement set value of the center console units 200 and 220 and the protrusion of the display unit. It has been described that the three types of set values, the set value and the protrusion set value of the operation unit, are stored. However, each set value may be configured with only one type of set value. The capacity can be reduced as much as possible and the convenience of the device can be obtained. Industrial applicability As described above, the information processing apparatus for a mobile object according to the present invention reads visible information such as a receipt or a sightseeing guidebook in a mobile object such as a car by an imaging means, analyzes the contents, and performs predetermined information processing. This is suitable for use as an information processing device for a moving object.

Claims

請求の範囲 The scope of the claims
1 . 移動体内に設けられ、 可視情報を撮影する撮像手段と、 複数の可視 情報を記憶した記憶手段と、 上記撮像手段が撮影した可視情報と上記記 憶手段に記憶された可視情報とを比較し解析する解析手段と、 上記移動 体内に設けられた表示手段、 この表示手段に対し上記解析手段の解析結 ' 果を表示させる表示制御手段とを備えたことを特徴とする移動体用情 報処理装置。 1. An imaging unit provided in the moving body for capturing visible information, a storage unit storing a plurality of visible information, and comparing the visible information captured by the imaging unit with the visible information stored in the storage unit. Information for a mobile object, comprising: analysis means for performing analysis on the display; display means provided in the mobile object; and display control means for displaying an analysis result of the analysis means on the display means. Processing equipment.
2 . 移動体内の前部中央部に表示手段を設けるとともに、 撮像手段は上 記表示手段の近傍に設け、 上記撮像手段で撮影され解析手段で解析され た結果を上記表示手段に表示可能に構成したことを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の移動体用情報処理装置。 2. A display means is provided in the front center of the moving body, and an imaging means is provided near the display means, and a result photographed by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display means. 2. The information processing device for a mobile object according to claim 1, wherein:
3 . 移動体内の運転席と助手席との間に挟まれる位置に設けられ、 表示 部を有する配設手段と、 この配設手段を上記移動体の前後方向に沿って 移動可能に案内する案内手段とを設けるとともに、 撮像手段は上記配設 手段の一部に設け、 上記撮像手段で撮影され解析手段で解析された結果 ■ を上記表示部に表示可能に構成したことを特徴とする請求項 1に記載 の移動体用情報処理装置。 3. Arrangement means provided between the driver's seat and the passenger's seat in the moving body and having a display portion, and a guide for guiding the arranging means so as to be movable in the front-back direction of the moving body. Means, and an imaging means is provided in a part of the arranging means, and a result obtained by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display section. 2. The information processing device for a mobile object according to 1.
4 . 解析手段の解析結果が費用に関する情報の場合、 表示制御手段は費 用管理が可能な表示を行うようにすることを特徴とする請求項 1に記 載の移動体用情報処理装置。 4. The mobile information processing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein when the analysis result of the analysis means is information relating to the cost, the display control means performs a display capable of managing the cost.
5 . 移動体内に設けられ、 可視情報を撮影する撮像手段と、 複数の可視 情報を記憶した記憶手段と、 上記撮像手段が撮影した可視情報と上記記 憶手段に記憶された可視情報とを比較し解析する解析手段と、 上記移動 体の現在位置とこの現在位置周辺の地図情報とを表示させるナビゲー ション手段とを備え、 上記解析手段の解析結果を上記ナビゲーシヨン手 段の設定情報に用いることを特徴とする移動体用情報処理装置。 5. An imaging unit provided in the moving body for capturing visible information, and a plurality of visible Storage means for storing information; analysis means for comparing and analyzing the visible information captured by the imaging means with the visible information stored in the storage means; a current position of the moving object and a map around the current position And a navigation means for displaying the information and the information. The information processing apparatus for a mobile object is characterized in that an analysis result of the analysis means is used for setting information of the navigation means.
6 . 解析手段が解析した可視情報の内容に基づき、 ナビゲ一シヨン手段 の設定情報に利用可能な機能を表示する表示手段と、 この表示手段に表 示された機能から所定の機能を選択する選択手段とを設けたことを特 徴とする請求項 5に記載の移動体用情報処理装置。 6. Based on the contents of the visible information analyzed by the analysis means, a display means for displaying functions available in the setting information of the navigation means, and a selection for selecting a predetermined function from the functions displayed on the display means. 6. The mobile information processing device according to claim 5, wherein the information processing device is provided with a means.
7 . 解析手段の解析結果が位置に関する情報の場合、 ナビゲーシヨン手 段の設定情報は、 上記位置情報を目的地の位置情報とすることを特徴と する請求項 5に記載の移動体用情報処理装置。 7. The mobile information processing apparatus according to claim 5, wherein when the analysis result of the analysis means is information on a position, the setting information of the navigation means uses the position information as the position information of the destination. apparatus.
8 . 移動体内の前部中央部に表示手段を設けるとともに、 撮像手段は上 記表示手段の近傍に設け、 上記撮像手段で撮影され解析手段で解析され た結果を上記表示手段に表示可能に構成したことを特徴とする請求項 5に記載の移動体用情報処理装置。 8. A display means is provided in the front center of the moving body, and an imaging means is provided in the vicinity of the display means so that a result photographed by the imaging means and analyzed by the analysis means can be displayed on the display means. 6. The information processing device for a mobile object according to claim 5, wherein:
9 . 移動体内の運転席と助手席との間に挟まれる位置に設けられ、 表示 部を有する配設手段と、 この配設手段を上記移動体の前後方向に沿って 移動可能に案内する案内手段とを設けるとともに、 撮像手段は上記配設 手段の一部に設け、 上記撮像手段で撮影され解析手段で解析された結果 を上記表示部に表示可能に構成したことを特徴とする請求項 5に記載 の移動体用情報処理装置。 9. Arrangement means provided between the driver's seat and the passenger's seat in the moving body and having a display portion, and a guide for guiding the arranging means so as to be movable in the front-rear direction of the moving body. Means, and an imaging means is provided in a part of the arranging means, and a result photographed by the imaging means and analyzed by the analyzing means can be displayed on the display unit. The information processing device for a mobile object according to claim 1.
PCT/JP2001/004433 2001-05-28 2001-05-28 Information processor for moving body WO2002096713A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2002520794A JPWO2002096713A1 (en) 2001-05-28 2001-05-28 Mobile information processing device
PCT/JP2001/004433 WO2002096713A1 (en) 2001-05-28 2001-05-28 Information processor for moving body

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2001/004433 WO2002096713A1 (en) 2001-05-28 2001-05-28 Information processor for moving body

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2002096713A1 true WO2002096713A1 (en) 2002-12-05

Family

ID=11737356

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2001/004433 WO2002096713A1 (en) 2001-05-28 2001-05-28 Information processor for moving body

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2002096713A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2002096713A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008070337A (en) * 2006-09-15 2008-03-27 Denso Corp On-board navigation apparatus
JP2012022592A (en) * 2010-07-16 2012-02-02 Clarion Co Ltd Facility information display apparatus, network system, and facility information display method
GB2505567A (en) * 2013-08-21 2014-03-05 Daimler Ag Vehicle interior conveyor
CN110316092A (en) * 2018-03-30 2019-10-11 比亚迪股份有限公司 Vehicle
CN110843687A (en) * 2018-08-21 2020-02-28 蔚来汽车有限公司 Control panel assembly for vehicle, vehicle control system and vehicle

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH045800A (en) * 1990-04-23 1992-01-09 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Monitoring device for relative position of vehicles
JPH0914976A (en) * 1995-06-29 1997-01-17 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd On-vehicle navigation system
JPH10281795A (en) * 1997-04-07 1998-10-23 Toyota Motor Corp Guidance display device for vehicle
JP2000304559A (en) * 1999-04-22 2000-11-02 Xanavi Informatics Corp Navigation system and information presentation system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH045800A (en) * 1990-04-23 1992-01-09 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Monitoring device for relative position of vehicles
JPH0914976A (en) * 1995-06-29 1997-01-17 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd On-vehicle navigation system
JPH10281795A (en) * 1997-04-07 1998-10-23 Toyota Motor Corp Guidance display device for vehicle
JP2000304559A (en) * 1999-04-22 2000-11-02 Xanavi Informatics Corp Navigation system and information presentation system

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008070337A (en) * 2006-09-15 2008-03-27 Denso Corp On-board navigation apparatus
JP4687622B2 (en) * 2006-09-15 2011-05-25 株式会社デンソー Car navigation system
JP2012022592A (en) * 2010-07-16 2012-02-02 Clarion Co Ltd Facility information display apparatus, network system, and facility information display method
GB2505567A (en) * 2013-08-21 2014-03-05 Daimler Ag Vehicle interior conveyor
CN110316092A (en) * 2018-03-30 2019-10-11 比亚迪股份有限公司 Vehicle
CN110316092B (en) * 2018-03-30 2022-10-18 比亚迪股份有限公司 Vehicle with a steering wheel
CN110843687A (en) * 2018-08-21 2020-02-28 蔚来汽车有限公司 Control panel assembly for vehicle, vehicle control system and vehicle
CN110843687B (en) * 2018-08-21 2023-09-01 蔚来(安徽)控股有限公司 Vehicle control panel assembly, vehicle control system and vehicle

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2002096713A1 (en) 2004-09-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4270881B2 (en) Mobile device arrangement device
US11348374B2 (en) Vehicular driver monitoring system
US6795757B2 (en) On-vehicle display device
US8700309B2 (en) Multiple visual display device and vehicle-mounted navigation system
US6708086B2 (en) Vehicle computer
US8025327B1 (en) Theft and tamper resistant vehicle interior
JP4792522B2 (en) Portable adapter and software for use with head-up display devices
US20100077437A1 (en) Vehicle entertainment system with video surround
CN117279804A (en) Rotary vehicle center information display with fixed buttons and touch bars
JP2008280037A (en) Display device for moving element
WO2002096714A1 (en) Display for moving body
WO2002096713A1 (en) Information processor for moving body
JP7251381B2 (en) Vehicle experience device
JP4242791B2 (en) In-vehicle image information processing device
JP2000309247A (en) In-dashboard monitor for vehicle
JP6520635B2 (en) In-vehicle display system
EP4292879A1 (en) Table assembly for a truck
JP2006273255A (en) Back confirmation monitoring system, in-vehicle monitoring device, small size monitoring device and automobile
JP2006051903A (en) Notebook-sized personal computer, vehicular display system, vehicle and holder
JP2004034795A (en) On-vehicle appliance

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

Ref document number: 2002 520794

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

Ref document number: 2002520794

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): JP US

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase